CJ1G/H-CPU
Cat. No. W342-E1-14
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series
CS1G/[email protected]@H
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@S
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]@H-R
CJ1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@P
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
CP1L-M/[email protected]@@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands
REFERENCE MANUAL
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series
CS1G/[email protected]@H
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@S
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]@H-R
CJ1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@P
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
CP1L-M/[email protected]@@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands
Reference Manual
Revised July 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
© OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
CJ Series
CJ2 CPU Units
[email protected]
[email protected]
CJ1-H CPU Units
NSJ Series
NSJ Controllers
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@P
(Loop CPU Units)
[email protected]@(B)-G5D
NSJ Controllers
[email protected]@(B)-M3D
[email protected]@(B)-M3D
CJ1M CPU Units
CP1E CPU Units
[email protected]@[email protected]@*2
[email protected]@[email protected]@*3
[email protected]@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@H
CP Series
CS1-H CPU Units
[email protected]@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@(B)-G5D
[email protected]@H-R
CS Series
[email protected]@(B)-M3D
CS1D CPU Units
CP1L CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex Systems
CP1L-L @@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@H
CS1D CPU Units for
Simplex Systems
CP1H CPU Units
[email protected]@S
CS1D Process-control CPU Units
[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@DT-D
[email protected]@P
CP-series Expansion I/O Units
CJ1 CPU Units
CS1 CPU Units
[email protected]@
CP-series Expansion Units
[email protected]@(-V)
[email protected]@ (-V)
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
NSJ-series Expansion Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CJ-series Special I/O Units*1
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units*1
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CJ-series Power Supply Units
CS-series Power Supply Units
Note: A special Power Supply Unit
must be used for CS1D CPU Units.
*1 Can only be used with the CP1H CPU unit.
*2 Indicated as "E-type" in some parts of this manual.
*3 Indicated as "N-type" in some parts of this manual.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
4
5
xv
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
xvi
xvi
xviii
xix
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
Overview of Communications Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
4
SECTION 2
Overview of C-mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
C-mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command/Response Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
9
14
15
SECTION 3
Overview of FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Command and Response Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for Sending FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Gateway Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
30
32
34
43
66
86
SECTION 4
C-mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
4-1
4-2
4-3
C-mode Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-mode Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
103
105
SECTION 5
FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5-1
5-2
5-3
Command Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designating Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
163
170
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
vii
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communications commands used with CS/
CJ-series and CP-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and NSJ Controllers, and includes the
sections described below.
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you understand information provided before attempting to design or implement communications for CS/CJ-series
or CP-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or NSJ Controllers.
Name
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@H, [email protected]@S, [email protected]@H-R,
[email protected]@, [email protected]@, [email protected]@P,
CJ1G/[email protected]@H, [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected]@-V1, [email protected]@-V1, [email protected]@-V1,
[email protected]@@@[email protected], [email protected]@@@[email protected], [email protected]@@@[email protected],
CP1L-M/[email protected]@@[email protected], [email protected]@[email protected]@,
[email protected]@[email protected]@, [email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D,
[email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H, [email protected]@H, [email protected]@S, [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]@H-R, [email protected]@, [email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H, [email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@H, [email protected]@S, [email protected]@,
[email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H,
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS Series
[email protected]@H CPU Units
[email protected]@S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA207R Power Supply Unit
Duplex System Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series
[email protected]@, [email protected]@, [email protected]@P, CJ1G/[email protected]@H
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series
[email protected]@
Built-in I/O Operation Manual
Cat. No.
Contents
W342
Describes the communications commands used
with CS-series, CJ-series, and CP-series PLCs
and NSJ Controllers. (This manual)
W474
Describes the ladder diagram programming
instructions supported by CS/CJ-series PLCs and
NSJ Controllers.
W394
This manual describes programming and other
methods to use the functions of the CS/CJ-series
PLCs and NSJ Controllers.
W405
Provides an outline of and describes the design,
installation, maintenance, and other basic operations for a Duplex System based on CS1D CPU
Units.
W339
Provides an outlines of and describes the design,
installation, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CS-series PLCs.
Provides an outlines of and describes the design,
installation, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
W393
W395
Describes the functions of the built-in I/O for
CJ1M CPU Units.
ix
Name
Cat. No.
SYSMAC CJ Series [email protected], [email protected]
CPU Unit Software User’s Manual
W473
SYSMAC CJ Series [email protected], [email protected]
CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual
W472
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
[email protected]
EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual
W465
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
[email protected]@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@(B)-G5D, [email protected]@(B)G5D, [email protected]@(B)-M3D, [email protected]@(B)-M3D, [email protected]@(B)-M3D, NSJW-ETN21, NSJW-CLK21-V1, NSJWIC101
NSJ Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CP Series
[email protected]@, [email protected]@,
CP1H-Y20DT-D
CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CP Series
[email protected]@@@[email protected], [email protected]@@@[email protected],
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
CP1H CPU Unit Programming Manual
SYSMAC CP Series
[email protected]@,
[email protected]@,
[email protected]@,
[email protected]@,
[email protected]@,
[email protected]@
CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User's
Manual
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
W452
x
Contents
Describes the following for CJ2 CPU Units:
• CPU Unit operation
• Internal memory
• Programming
• Settings
• Function built into the CPU Unit
Also refer to the Hardware User's Manual (W472)
Describes the following for CJ2 CPU Units:
• Overview and features
• Basic system configuration
• Part nomenclature and functions
• Mounting and setting procedure
• Remedies for errors
Also refer to the Software User's Manual (W473)
Describes the built-in EtherNet/IP port and EtherNet/IP Units.
Describes basic settings, tag data links, FINS
communication, and other functions.
Provides basic specifications on NSJ Controllers,
including an overview, designing, installation, and
maintenance.
W450
Provides basic specifications on CP-series CP1H
PLCs, including an overview, designing, installation, and maintenance.
W451
Provides information on programming CP-series
PLCs.
W462
Provides basic specifications on CP-series CP1L
PLCs, including an overview, designing, installation, and maintenance.
W479
Describes the following information for CP1E
PLCs.
• Overview and features
• Basic system configuration
• Part names and functions
• Installation and settings
• Troubleshooting
Name
Cat. No.
SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Software User's
Manual
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
W480
SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Instructions
Reference Manual
[email protected]@[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]@
SYSMAC [email protected]@[email protected]/[email protected]@[email protected]
CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual
W483
SYSMAC
[email protected]@[email protected]/, [email protected]@[email protected], CS/CJ/CP/
NSJ Series
CX-Integrator Operation Manual
SYSMAC
[email protected]@[email protected]
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
W464
SYSMAC CX-Programmer
[email protected]@[email protected]
Operation Manual: Function Blocks/Structured Text
SYSMAC
[email protected]@[email protected]
CX-Programmer Operation Manual: SFC
W447
W463
W446
W469
Contents
Describes the following information for CP1E
PLCs.
• CPU Unit operation
• Internal memory
• Programming
• Settings
• CPU Unit built-in functions
• Interrupts
• High-speed counter inputs
• Pulse outputs
• Serial communications
• Other functions
Describes each programming instruction in detail.
Provides an overview of the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package and CX-One installation procedures.
Describes setting and monitoring networks.
Describes operating procedures for the CX-Programmer Support Software running on a Windows computer.
Describes specifications and procedures required
to use function blocks/structured text.
Describes specifications and procedures required
to use SFC programming functions.
Section 1 introduces the C-mode commands and FINS commands, and explains the relationship
between them.
Section 2 provides an overview of C-mode commands.
Section 3 provides an overview of FINS commands.
Section 4 provides detailed descriptions of the C-mode commands.
Section 5 provides detailed descriptions of the FINS commands.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xi
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xiii
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xiv
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1
2
3
4
5
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
xvi
xvi
xviii
xix
xv
Intended Audience
1
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
xvi
Safety Precautions
3
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V-DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Memory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
peripheral tool. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit may malfunction regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution The CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Unit automatically backs up the
user program and parameter data to flash memory when these are written to
the CPU Unit. I/O memory (including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is
not written to flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during
power interruptions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of
these areas may not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of
the DM, EM, and HR Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A402.04)
is ON.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
xvii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. Loose screws may result in burning
or malfunction.
!Caution Do not touch the Power Supply Unit when power is being supplied or immediately after the power supply is turned OFF. The Power Supply Unit will be hot
and you may be burned.
!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices
to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK12/52(-V1) or
CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply. A short-circuit will be
created if the 24 V side of the external power supply is grounded and the 0 V
side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral
device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of the external power
supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
xviii
Application Precautions
5
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks.
A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask programs originally created with the CX-Programmer.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a class-3 ground (to 100 Ω or less) when installing the
Units. Not connecting to a class-3 ground may result in electric shock.
• A class-3 ground (to 100 Ω or less) must be installed when connecting the
GR and LG terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Inner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• The user program and parameter area data in the CS1-H, CS1D, CJ1-H,
and CJ1M CPU Units are backed up in the built-in flash memory. The
BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the backup
operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU
Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not be backed up if
power is turned OFF.
• When using a CS-series CS1 CPU Unit for the first time, install the
CS1W-BAT01 Battery provided with the Unit and clear all memory areas
from a Programming Device before starting to program. (Not required for
CS1-H, CJ1, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Units.)
• When using the internal clock for a CS-series CS1 CPU Unit, turn ON
power after installing the battery and set the clock from a Programming
Device or using the DATE(735) instruction. The clock will not start until the
time has been set. (Not required for CS1-H, CJ1, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D
CPU Units.)
• When using a CS1-H, CJ1, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Unit, the PLC
Setup is set to specify using the mode set on the Programming Console,
and a Programming Console is not connected, the CPU Unit will start in
RUN mode. This is the default setting in the PLC Setup. A CS1 CPU Unit
will start in PROGRAM mode under the same conditions.
xix
Application Precautions
5
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area.
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being transferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A402.04)
to re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• When supplying power at 200 to 240 VAC for CS-series PLCs, always
remove the metal jumper from the voltage selector terminals. The product
will be destroyed if 200 to 240 VAC is supplied while the metal jumper is
attached.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
xx
Application Precautions
5
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• With CS-series PLCs, be sure that all the Unit and Backplane mounting
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other preparations before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper settings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
xxi
Application Precautions
5
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
• Never connect pin 6 (5-V power supply) on the RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit to any device other than an NT-AL001 or CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter. The
external device or the CPU Unit may be damaged.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic material to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature to protect the LSIs, ICs, and other components.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as
they apply. Have qualified specialists properly dispose of used batteries
as industrial waste.
• With a CJ-series PLC, the sliders on the tops and bottoms of the Power
Supply Unit, CPU Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
must be completely locked (until they click into place). The Unit may not
operate properly if the sliders are not locked in place.
• With a CJ-series PLC, always connect the End Plate to the Unit on the
right end of the PLC. The PLC will not operate properly without the End
Plate.
• Unexpected operation may result if inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set. Even if appropriate data link tables and parameters
have been set, confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before starting or stopping data links.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
xxii
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the C-mode commands and FINS commands, and explains the relationship between them.
1-1
Overview of Communications Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
C-mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-3
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1
Overview of Communications Commands
1-1
Section 1-1
Overview of Communications Commands
Communications Commands Addressed to CS/CJ/CP/NSJ-series Units
A CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Unit or NSJ Controller can receive the following
communications commands.
C-mode commands via Host Link
Communications commands
FINS commands
Via CMND(490)/SEND(090)/RECV(098)
Via Host Link
C-mode Commands
C-mode commands are specialized Host Link communications commands.
They are issued by a host computer and sent to a CPU Unit. The devices that
can be connected for serial communications are the CPU Unit, a Serial Communications Unit, and a Serial Communications Board.
FINS Commands
FINS commands are message service communications commands. They do
not depend on a particular transmission path. They can be used for communications on various networks (Controller Link, Ethernet, etc.) and for serial
communications (Host Link). They can be issued from a CPU Unit, Special I/O
Unit, or host computer, and they can also be sent to any of these. The specific
commands that can be sent depend on the destination.
This manual explains commands sent to CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Units and
NSJ Controllers, when the commands are issued from a CPU Unit or a host
computer connected by Host Link.
Note When the source of the commands is a CPU Unit, the FINS commands are
sent by means of CMND(490)/SEND(090)/RECV(098). When the source is a
host computer, the FINS commands are issued using Host Link protocol.
1-2
C-mode Commands
The following table lists the C-mode (Host Link) commands. For details, refer
to SECTION 4 C-mode Commands.
Type
I/O memory
reading
2
Header
code
RR
Name
CIO AREA READ
RL
LR AREA READ
RH
HR AREA READ
RC
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ
RG
RD
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS
READ
DM AREA READ
RJ
AR AREA READ
RE
EM AREA READ
Function
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated CIO word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated LR word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated HR word.
Reads the specified number of words of the timer/counter
PV beginning with the designated word.
Reads the specified number of words of the timer/counter
status beginning with the designated word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated DM word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated AR word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with the
designated EM word.
C-mode Commands
Type
I/O memory
writing
Section 1-2
Header
code
WR
Name
Function
PLC model code
reading
Testing
MM
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated CIO word.
LR AREA WRITE
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated LR word.
HR AREA WRITE
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated HR word.
TIMER/COUNTER PV WRITE Writes the specified timer/counter PV data in word units
beginning with the designated word.
DM AREA WRITE
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated DM word.
AR AREA WRITE
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated AR word.
EM AREA WRITE
Writes the specified data in word units beginning with the
designated EM word.
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ Reads in four digits BCD the constant SV that is written as
1
an operand of the designated timer/counter instruction.
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning
2
with the designated program address, and reads the constant SV in four digits or the word in which the SV is
stored.
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning
3
with the designated program address, and reads the constant SV in four digits (BCD) or the word in which the SV
is stored.
TIMER/COUNTER SV
Changes the SV of the specified timer/counter instruction
CHANGE 1
to a new constant SV.
TIMER/COUNTER SV
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning
CHANGE 2
with the designated program address in the user program,
and changes the constant SV in four digits (BCD) or the
word in which the SV is stored to a new constant SV or
storage word.
TIMER/COUNTER SV
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning
CHANGE 3
with the designated program address in the user program,
and changes the constant SV in four digits (BCD) or the
word in which the SV is stored to a new constant SV or
storage word.
STATUS READ
Reads the CPU Unit’s operating conditions (operating
mode, forced set/reset status, and fatal errors).
STATUS CHANGE
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode.
ERROR READ
Reads the CPU Unit’s error information (i.e., all fatal or
non-fatal errors currently in effect).
FORCED SET
Forcibly sets one designated bit.
FORCED RESET
Forcibly resets one designated bit.
MULTIPLE FORCED
Forcibly sets/resets/cancels multiple designated bits.
SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCancels all forced set/reset status.
CEL
PLC MODEL READ
Reads the model code of the CPU Unit.
TS
TEST
Program area
accessing
RP
PROGRAM READ
WP
PROGRAM WRITE
WL
WH
WC
WD
WJ
WE
Timer/counter SV
reading
R#
R$
R%
Timer/counter SV
changing
W#
W$
W%
CPU Unit status
MS
SC
MF
Forced
set/reset
KS
KR
FK
KC
CIO AREA WRITE
Returns, just as it is, a single block that was sent from the
host computer.
Reads, in one batch, the contents of the CPU Unit’s user
program at the machine language (object) level.
Writes into the CPU Unit’s user program area the
machine language (object) sent from the host computer.
3
FINS Commands
Type
Section 1-3
Header
code
Name
Function
I/O table creation
MI
I/O TABLE CREATE
I/O memory area
registration and
reading
QQMR
REGISTER I/O MEMORY
QQIR
Host Link commu- XZ
nications
processing
**
IC
1-3
READ I/O MEMORY
ABORT (command only)
INITIALIZE (command only)
Undefined command
(response only)
Creates an I/O table with the contents of the actual I/O
configuration.
Registers the I/O memory words or bits that are to be
read.
Reads the registered I/O memory words/bits all at once.
Aborts the operation being performed by a Host Link command, and then returns to the initial status.
Initializes the transfer control procedures for all Host Link
Units.
This is the response when the command header code
cannot be decoded.
FINS Commands
The following table lists the FINS commands. For details, refer to SECTION 5
FINS Commands.
Type
Command
code
MR
01
SR
01
01
02
01
03
01
04
01
05
02
01
02
02
02
03
03
03
06
07
03
08
04
01
04
02
Machine configura- 05
tion reading
05
01
02
Status reading
06
06
01
20
Time data access
07
01
07
02
I/O memory area
access
Parameter area
access
Program area
access
Operating mode
changes
4
Name
MEMORY AREA READ
Function
Reads the contents of consecutive I/O memory area words.
MEMORY AREA WRITE (See
Writes the contents of consecutive I/O memnote.)
ory area words.
MEMORY AREA FILL (See note.) Writes the same data to the specified range
of I/O memory area words.
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of specified non-consecutive I/O memory area words.
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER (See Copies the contents of consecutive I/O memnote.)
ory area words to another I/O memory area.
PARAMETER AREA READ
Reads the contents of consecutive parameter area words.
PARAMETER AREA WRITE (See Writes the contents of consecutive paramenote.)
ter area words.
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR) Clears the specified range of parameter area
(See note.)
words.
PROGRAM AREA READ
Reads the UM (User Memory) area.
PROGRAM AREA WRITE (See
Writes to the UM (User Memory) area.
note.)
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR (See
Clears a specified range of the UM (User
note.)
Memory) area.
RUN (See note.)
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode to
RUN or MONITOR.
STOP (See note.)
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode to
PROGRAM.
CPU UNIT DATA READ
Reads CPU Unit data.
CONNECTION DATA READ
Reads the model numbers of the device corresponding to addresses.
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
Reads the status of the CPU Unit.
CYCLE TIME READ
Reads the maximum, minimum, and average
cycle time.
CLOCK READ
Reads the present year, month, date,
minute, second, and day of the week.
CLOCK WRITE (See note.)
Changes the present year, month, date,
minute, second, or day of the week.
FINS Commands
Type
Section 1-3
Command
code
MR
SR
Message display
09
20
Access rights
0C
01
0C
02
0C
03
21
21
21
21
01
02
03
40
21
41
22
22
01
02
22
03
22
04
22
05
22
07
22
22
08
0A
22
0B
22
0C
22
15
22
20
23
01
23
02
Error log
FINS write access
log
File memory
Debugging
Name
Function
MESSAGE READ/CLEAR
Reads and clears messages, and reads
FAL/FALS messages.
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE (See
Acquires the access right as long as no other
note.)
device holds it.
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED
Acquires the access right even if another
ACQUIRE
device already holds it.
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
Releases the access right that has been
acquire.
ERROR CLEAR (See note.)
Clears errors or error messages.
ERROR LOG READ
Reads the error log.
ERROR LOG CLEAR (See note.)
Clears all error log records.
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ The CPU Unit automatically keeps a log of
any access for FINS write commands. This
command reads this log.
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG
Clears the FINS write access log.
CLEAR (See note.)
FILE NAME READ
Reads file device data.
SINGLE FILE READ
Reads a specified length of file data from a
specified position within a single file.
SINGLE FILE WRITE (See note.)
Writes a specified length of file data from a
specified position within a single file.
FILE MEMORY FORMAT (See
Formats (initializes) the file device.
note.)
FILE DELETE (See note.)
Deletes specified files stored in the file
device.
FILE COPY (See note.)
Copies files from one file device to another
file device in the same system.
FILE NAME CHANGE (See note.) Changes a file name.
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the I/O
(See note.)
memory area and the file device.
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANS- Transfers or compares data between the
FER (See note.)
parameter area and the file device.
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSTransfers or compares data between the UM
FER (See note.)
(User Memory) area and the file device.
DIRECTORY CREATE/DELETE
Creates or deletes a directory.
(See note.)
MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSTransfers and verifies data between a MemFER (CP1H/CP1L CPU Units only) ory Cassette and the CPU Unit.
FORCED SET/RESET (See note.) Force-sets or force-resets bits, or releases
force-set status.
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Cancels all bits that have been force-set or
(See note.)
force-reset.
Note These commands will not be accepted and an end code of 2102 hex (cannot
write due to protection) will be returned if the Write Protection from FINS
Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks option is selected in the PLC
Setup for a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later, for a CPseries CPU Unit, or for an NSJ Controller.
5
FINS Commands
6
Section 1-3
SECTION 2
Overview of C-mode Commands
This section provides an overview of C-mode (Host Link) commands.
2-1
C-mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
2-2
Command/Response Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
2-3
Application Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2-4
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-4-1
C-series Host Link Units with 1:N Host Link Format Selected . . . .
15
2-4-2
C-series Host Link Units with 1:1 Host Link Format Selected . . . .
20
2-4-3
C-mode Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
7
C-mode Commands
2-1
Section 2-1
C-mode Commands
C-mode (Host Link) commands form a command/response system for serial
communications (Host Link Mode) to perform various control operations
between a CPU Unit and a host computer directly connected to it. These
operations include reading from and writing to I/O memory, changing operating modes, executing forced set and forced reset operations, and so on.
Response
Response
C-mode command
C-mode command
Note
1. There are two Host Link formats: the 1:N Host Link (with N ≥ 1) and the 1:1
Host Link.
• The 1:1 Host Link is the earlier Host Link format supported by C-series
PLCs, such as the C200H, C1000H, and C2000H.
• The built-in peripheral and RS-232C ports of CS/CJ-series CPU Units,
built-in serial ports of N-type CP1E CPU Units, serial port C on NSJ
Controllers, and serial ports 1 and 2 on the Option Board for CP-series
CPU Units support only the 1:N Host Link format. When a Serial Communications Board or Unit (version 1.2 or later) is being used, a 1:1
Host Link program created for a C-series PLC (C200H/C1000H/
C2000H) can be reused by selecting the Host Link 1:1 format.
In this manual, the term “Host Link” generally indicates the 1:N Host Link.
2. Unlike FINS commands, C-mode commands can only be addressed to a
CPU Unit, and they cannot be used for message service outside of the local network. They cannot be used for functions such as file operations.
C-mode (Host Link) commands can be sent from a host computer connected
to a CS/CJ-series Host Link Unit. Up to 32 PLCs (Host Link Units) can be connected to a single host computer. For identification, each Host Link Unit is
assigned a unit number from 0 to 31.
The length of a single unit of a command or response exchange is called a
“frame.” A single frame contains a maximum of 131 characters of data. Characters are sent and received as ASCII.
Note For a CS/CJ-series PLC, a “Host Link Unit” can be the CPU Unit, a Serial
Communications Unit, or a Serial Communications Board.
A maximum of 30 words of data can be transferred for the first command
frame and a maximum of 31 words of data can be transferred for other command frames when reading or writing word data in I/O memory. When reading/writing more than 30 words of data, the data transfer will be processed in
multiple transmissions, with 30 words in the first and up to 31 words in each of
8
Command/Response Formats
Section 2-2
the following transmissions until the number of words set in the command has
been processed.
The frame formats for Host Link commands sent from a host computer and
responses returned by the PLC receiving the commands are explained in the
following section.
2-2
Command/Response Formats
Single-frame Commands
If a command is not more than 131 characters long, communications can be
completed by sending a single command frame. This is called a “single-frame
command.”
Command Frame Format
Terminator
Text
Header code
FCS
Unit number (BCD)
• @:
Must be attached at the beginning of the command.
• Unit number: Set in BCD from 0 to 31 for each Host Link Unit.
• Header code: Specified in two characters.
Single-frame Response
• Text:
Set parameters corresponding to command code.
• FCS:
Calculate 2-character FCS (frame check sequence) at host
computer. For details on calculating FCS, refer to FCS Calculations later in this section.
• Terminator:
Set “*” and CR (CHR$(13)) as two characters to indicate
the end of the command.
If a response is not more than 131 characters long, the communications can
be completed by returning one response frame. This is called a “single-frame
response.”
Response Frame Format
Terminator
Text
End code (hexadecimal)
FCS
Header code
Unit number (BCD)
• @:
Must be attached at the beginning of the response.
• Unit number: Set in BCD from 0 to 31 for each Host Link Unit.
• Header code: The command code that was received is returned.
• End code:
The results (error status, etc.) of command execution is
returned.
• Text:
Returned only if there is read data.
9
Command/Response Formats
Error Response Formant
Section 2-2
• FCS:
The 2-character FCS (frame check sequence) is returned.
• Terminator:
Two characters indicating the end of the command, “*” and
CR (CHR$(13)), are returned.
If a reception error or an error in executing the command occurs, a response
is returned with no text.
Terminator
FCS
End code (hexadecimal)
Header code
Unit number (BCD)
Partitioned Commands
If a command is longer than 131 characters, the command’s text is partitioned
by sending a delimiter [CR code, CHR$(13)] instead of a terminator at the end
of each command frame until the last one. A terminator is sent at the end of
the last frame. The procedure is given below for three command frames.
Note When sending command frames for writing (WR, WL, WC, WD, etc.), be careful not to partition into separate frames data that is to be written into the same
word.
1,2,3...
1. From the host computer, attach a delimiter (CR) at the end of command
frame 1 and send the frame.
2. When the PLC receives this delimiter (CR), it will return only a delimiter
(CR) to the host computer.
3. From the host computer, attach a delimiter (CR) at the end of command
frame 2 and send the frame.
4. When the PLC receives this delimiter (CR), it will return only a delimiter
(CR) to the host computer.
5. From the host computer, attach a terminator (*CR) at the end of command
frame 3 and send the frame.
6. When the PLC receives this terminator (*CR), it will return the response
format with a terminator (*CR) attached to the end.
10
Command/Response Formats
Section 2-2
The following diagram shows the command format when there are more than
131 characters.
FCS
Terminator
Command frame 3
Text
FCS
Text
Delimiter
Command frame 2
Delimiter
FCS
Text
Host
Computer
Header code
@Unit number
Command frame 1
FCS
Terminator
Text
End code
Header code
@Unit number
Delimiter
PLC
Delimiter
128 characters max. 128 characters max.
Response frame
Note A “delimiter” is a CR code [CHR$(13)] sent as a single character to indicate
the middle of a command or response.
Partitioned Responses
If a response is more than 131 characters long, the response from the PLC is
partitioned by returning a delimiter (CR code, CHR$(13)) instead of a terminator at the end of each frame until the last one. A terminator is returned at the
end of the last frame.
In the following example procedure, the response is partitioned into three
frames.
1,2,3...
1. When the PLC receives the command frame from the host computer, it returns response frame 1 with a delimiter (CR) at the end to the host computer.
2. Only a delimiter (CR) is sent from the host computer to the PLC.
3. When the PLC receives this delimiter (CR), it returns response frame 2
with a delimiter (CR) at the end to the host computer.
4. Only a delimiter (CR) is sent from the host computer to the PLC.
5. When the PLC receives this delimiter (CR), it returns response frame 3
with a terminator (*CR) at the end to the host computer.
11
Command/Response Formats
Section 2-2
The following diagram shows the response format when there are more than
131 characters.
Delimiter
Delimiter
FCS
Terminator
Text
Header code
Host computer
@Unit number
Command frame
Response frame 1
FCS
Terminator
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Text
End code
Header code
PLC
@Unit number
131 characters max.
Response frame 2 Response frame 3
128 characters max. 128 characters max.
Note
1. Frames in partitioned commands or responses must have not more than
128 characters including the delimiter/terminator.
2. Delimiters from the host computer are detected by the presence of a CR
code. The delimiter will be detected even if there is data in front of it.
12
Command/Response Formats
FCS Calculations
Section 2-2
The PLC calculates the FCS (Frame Check Sequence) value for each command frame it receives, and it checks for errors by comparing that value with
the FCS value sent with the command frame. The host computer must calculate the FCS value when sending a command frame.
Also, when checking for errors in response frames, the host computer must
calculate the FCS value for each response frame it receives and compare that
value to the FCS value sent in the response frame.
Terminator
Text
Header code
FCS
Unit number
FCS calculation range
ASCII
Code
@
40
0100
0000
EOR
1
31
0011
0001
EOR
0
30
0011
0000
EOR
R
52
0101
1
31
0011
0100
Calculation result
(See note.)
4 Hex
•
•
•
0010
0001
0010
2 Hex
The value is converted to hexadecimal
and handled as ASCII.
Note The FCS is an 8-bit value converted into two ASCII characters. The 8-bit
value is the result of an exclusive OR sequentially performed between each
character in a transmission, from the first character in the frame to the last
character of the text in that frame. Non-ASCII data, however, may sometimes
be sent in the text data. If the data length is 7 bits, the leftmost bit of each
character is masked before the FCS is calculated.
13
Application Example
2-3
Section 2-3
Application Example
Sending a Host Link Command from a Host Computer
In this example program, a Host Link command is sent from a host computer
and a response is received.
10 ’CS1 SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR EXCEPTION
20 CLOSE
30 CLS
40 OPEN “COM:E73”AS#1
50 *KEYIIN
60 INPUT ”DATA–”,S
70 IF S$=””THEN GOTO 190
80 PRINT ”SEND DATA=”;S$
90 ST$=S$
100 INPUT ”SEND OK? Y or N?=”,BS
110 IF B$=”Y” THEN GOTO 130 ELSE GOTO *KEYIN
120 S$=ST$
130 PRINT #T,S$
Sends command to PLC.
140 INPUT #1,R$
Receives command from PLC.
150 PRINT ”RECV DATA=”;R$
160 IF MID$(R$,4,2)=”EX”THEN GOTO 210
Identifies command.
170 IF RIGHT$(R$,1)<>”*”THEN S$=””:GOTO 130
180 GOTO *KEYIN
190 CLOSE 1
200 END
210 PRINT ”EXCEPTION!!DATA”
220 GOTO 140
Explanation
1,2,3...
1. The host computer’s transmission/reception program is started up, and the
Host Link command is input.
2. The Host Link command that was input is sent to the PLC, and the data
that is received is displayed on the screen.
Note The example program up to this point does not include an error processing
routine in case reception is not normal (e.g., if there is no FCS). Include error
processing routines when creating an actual program.
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
14
*FCSCHCK
L=LEN(RESPONSE$)
Transmission/reception data
Q=0:FCSCK$=””
A$=RIGHT$(RESPONSE$,1)
PRINT RESPONSE$,A$,L
IF A$=”*”THEN LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)–3
ELSE LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)–2
FCSP$=MID$(RESPONSE$,LENGS+1,2)
FCS data that is received
FOR I=1 TO LENGS
Number of characters in FCS calculation
Q=ASC(MID$(RESPONSE$1,1))XOR Q
NEXT 1
FCSD$=HEX$(Q)
IF LEN(FCSD$) =1 THEN FCSD$=”0”+FCSD$
FCS calculation result
IF FCSD$<>FCSP$ THEN FCSCK$=”ERR”
PRINT ”FCSD$=”;FCSD$,”FCSP$=”;FCSP$,”FCSCK$=”;FCSCK$
Normal FCS reception: “ ” (space); abnormal FCS reception: “ERR”
RETURN
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
2-4
Section 2-4
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Observe the following precautions when reusing host computer programs created for communications with C-series Host Link Units.
2-4-1
C-series Host Link Units with 1:N Host Link Format Selected
Using the CPU Unit's Built-in Peripheral Port or RS-232C Port
Number of Data Words per Frame
When I/O memory data is read with the following commands, the number of
data words in each response frame is different for a C-series Host Link Unit
compared to the built-in peripheral and RS-232C ports on CS/CJ-series CPU
Units, serial port C on NSJ Controllers, built-in serial ports of N-type CP1E
CPU Units, and serial ports 1 and 2 on the Option Board for CP-series CPU
Units.
With a C-series Host Link Unit, the first frame can contain up to 29 words of
data (text) and the following frames can contain up to 30 words of data (text).
With the built-in peripheral and RS-232C ports on CS/CJ-series CPU Units,
serial port C on NSJ Controllers, built-in serial ports of N-type CP1E CPU
Units, and serial ports 1 and 2 on the Option Board for CP-series CPU Units,
the first frame can contain up to 30 words of data (text) and the following
frames can contain up to 31 words of data (text).
Header code
RR
RL
RH
RC
RG
RD
RJ
Name
CIO AREA READ
LR AREA READ
HR AREA READ
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ
Note: The number of data words per response frame is different
for the RG command than for the other C-mode commands.
For details, see the table Words per Frame for C-mode RG
Command below.
DM AREA READ
AR AREA READ
Because the Units do not have the same number of words per response
frame, the data may not be read properly if a host computer program originally
used with a C-series Host Link Unit is reused with a CS-series CPU Unit, CJseries CPU Unit, CP-series CPU Unit, or NSJ Controller. In this case, be sure
to edit the host computer program so that it is compatible with the frame format.
Note Serial Communications Boards and Units with version numbers 1.2 and later
are equipped with a Host Link model compatibility selection function that
changes the Host Link function's specifications to match the frame format of
other Units in the Host Link. It is not necessary to edit an existing program if
the Host Link model compatibility selection function is set to match the Host
Link format used in the program. For details, see Using a Serial Communications Board or Unit with Version Number 1.2 or Later below.
15
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Words per Frame for C-mode Commands (Except RG Command)
Units
C Series
CS/CJ Series
CVM1 and CV Series
Data words per frame
Other frames
1 frame
st
C-series
Host Link
Units
Other
Boards and
Units
C200H-LK101/LK201/
LK202 Host Link Units
C500-LK103/LK203
Host Link Units
3G2A5-LK101/LK201
Host Link Units
3G2A6-LK101/LK201/
LK202 Host Link Units
SRM1 built-in ports
CPM1 built-in ports
CPM1A built-in ports
---
---
29 words
30 words
[email protected]@(-EIP)
built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in 30 words
ports
31 words
CS1G/[email protected]@H
built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in
ports
[email protected]@ built-in
CV500-LK201 Host
CS1G/H-CPU
@@
-EV1
ports
Link Unit
built-in ports
[email protected]@ [email protected]@
H
builtCS1D-CPU
in ports
in ports
C200HX/HG/HECJ1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@ built-in ports
built-in ports
[email protected]@
Communications Board [email protected]@ built-in
ports
ports
[email protected]@ built-in
ports
CS1W-SCB21-V1/
41-V1 (unit version:
Pre-Ver. 1.2) Serial
Communications Board
ports
CS1W-SCU21-V1 (unit
version: Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Serial Communications Unit ports
CJ1W-SCU21/41 (unit
version: Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Serial Communications Unit ports
16
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Words per Frame for C-mode RG Command
Units
C Series
CS/CJ Series
CVM1 and CV Series
Data words per frame
Other frames
1 frame
st
C-series
Host Link
Units
Other
Boards and
Units
C200H-LK101/LK201/
LK202 Host Link Units
C500-LK103/LK203
Host Link Units
3G2A5-LK101/LK201
Host Link Units
3G2A6-LK101/LK201/
LK202 Host Link Units
SRM1 built-in ports
CPM1 built-in ports
CPM1A built-in ports
---
---
89 words
89 words
---
---
89 words
60 words
[email protected]@(-EIP)
built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in 121 words
ports
125 words
CS1G/[email protected]@H
built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in
ports
[email protected]@ built-in
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1 CV500-LK201 Host
ports
Link Unit
built-in ports
[email protected]@ [email protected]@
H
builtCS1D-CPU
in ports
in ports
[email protected]@ builtCJ1G/[email protected]@H
in ports
built-in
ports
C200HX/HG/[email protected]@
built-in
[email protected]@ built-in ports
ports
C200HW-CO[email protected]@
Communications Board [email protected]@ built-in
ports
ports
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41V1 (unit version: PreVer. 1.2) Serial Communications Board
ports
CS1W-SCU21-V1 (unit
version: Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Serial Communications Unit ports
CJ1W-SCU21/41 (unit
version: Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Serial Communications Unit ports
Note There are several exceptions to the number of words per frame values shown
in the table above:
The following responses are returned when reading 246 words of Timer/
Counter Completion Flags through CS/CJ-series CPU Unit built-in ports, CS/
CJ-series Serial Communications Units/Boards, C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
built-in ports, or C200HS CPU Unit built-in ports.
1st frame
121 words
2nd frame
124 words
3rd frame
1 word
The second-to-last frame contains 124 data words and the last frame contains
1 word. This also applies when the number of words is 246 + a multiple of 125
(i.e., 371 words, 496 words, 621 words, etc.).
The following responses are returned when reading 121 words of Timer/
Counter Completion Flags through CS/CJ-series Unit built-in ports.
1st frame
120 words
2nd frame
1 word
17
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
The following responses are returned when reading 121 words or 246 words
through CVM1 and CV-series CPU Unit built-in ports or CVM1/CV-series Host
Link Units.
Number of Words = 121
1st frame
121 words
2nd frame
0 words (terminator only)
Number of Words = 246
1st frame
121 words
2nd frame
125 words
3rd frame
0 words (terminator only)
The second-to-last frame contains 125 data words and the last frame contains
the terminator only. This also applies when the number of words is 246 + a
multiple of 125 (i.e., 371 words, 496 words, 621 words, etc.). For responses
containing the terminator only, “00*CR” (00 = FCS, CR = carriage return) is
returned.
Response Format for MS Command
With the MS command (STATUS READ), the response data format when
using CVM1 or CV-series built-in ports or Host Link Units, is different from the
response data format when using other Units.
When a CVM1/CV CPU Unit's built-in Host Link port or CVM1/CV Series Host
Link Unit is used and an FAL or FALS instruction has not been executed,
spaces (ASCII code 20 hex) will be included in the response data for the FAL/
FALS message. With all other Host Link Units, the FAL/FALS message data is
included in the response only when an FAL or FALS instruction has been executed.
Using a Pre-Ver. 1.2 Serial Communications Board or Unit
The response formats are the same as described above under the heading
Using the CPU Unit's Built-in Peripheral Port or RS-232C Port.
Using a Serial Communications Board or Unit with Version Number 1.2 or Later
The Serial Communications Board or Unit’s Host Link function can be made
completely compatible with the existing PLC’s Host Link function by setting
the appropriate Host Link mode (1:N or 1:1 Host Link) and the Host Link
model compatibility mode.
Host Link Model Compatibility Selection Function
Serial Communications Boards and Units with version Ver. 1.2 and later are
equipped with a Host Link model compatibility selection function. This function
switches the Board or Unit’s Host Link specifications to match the specifications of an existing Host Link program that is being reused. The following
specifications can be switched by the Host Link model compatibility function.
• Words per Response Frame
Sets the number of data words per response frame when receiving the following I/O memory read commands (RR, RL, RH, RC, RD, RJ, or RG).
• Sets the response frame format for the STATUS READ command (MS),
which varies when an FAL or FALS instruction has not been executed.
18
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Host Link Model Compatibility Modes
Host link
model
compatibility
mode
Host link model
(Model used as basis for host
computer’s program)
RR, RL, RH, RC, RD,
and RJ commands
Data words per response frame
1st
A mode
(CS, CJ, and
C)
RG command
C Series
SRM1 built-in ports
CPM1 built-in ports
CPM1A built-in ports
frame 2nd frame 1st frame 2nd frame
30 words
31 words
121
words
125
words
MS
command
(see note)
Response
data format
Variable
length
[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
C200HX/HG/[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ Communications
Board ports
CS/CJ Series
[email protected]@(-EIP) built-in ports
CS1G/[email protected]@H built-in ports
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1 built-in ports
[email protected]@H built-in ports
CJ1G/[email protected]@H built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1 (unit version:
Pre-Ver. 1.2) Serial Communications
Board ports
CS1W-SCU21-V1 (unit version: Pre-Ver.
1.2) Serial Communications Unit ports
CJ1W-SCU21/41 (unit version: Pre-Ver.
1.2) Serial Communications Unit ports
B mode
(CVM1/CV)
C mode
(C200H)
D mode
(C500/C120)
[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
CV500-LK201 Host Link Unit
C200H-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
C500-LK103/LK203 Host Link Units
3G2A5-LK101/LK201 Host Link Units
3G2A6-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
Fixed length
29 words
30 words
89 words
89 words
89 words
60 words
Variable
length
Note When the MS command reads the CPU Unit’s status data and an FAL or
FALS instruction has not been executed, spaces (ASCII code 20 hex) are
included as the FAL/FALS message in the response frame for some models
(fixed length response in the table above). In the other models, no data is
included as the FAL/FALS message in the response frame (variable length
response frame) if an FAL or FALS instruction has not been executed.
19
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Relationship to the 1:N Host Link/1:1 Host Link Setting
The following table shows the allowed Host Link format (1:N Host Link/1:1 Host
Link) settings for each Host Link model compatibility setting.
Host link model
compatibility mode
A mode (CS, CJ, and C)
and B mode (CVM1/CV)
C mode (C500/C120)
and D mode (C200H)
Host link format
Only the 1:N Host Link format can be used.
Either the 1:N Host Link format or 1:1 Host Link format
can be selected.
Settings for an Example Unit Replacement
Use the following settings when the existing host computer was created for a
system with C500-LK103/LK203 Host Link Units and/or 3G2A5-LK101/LK201
Host Link Units, a new Serial Communications Board or Unit (Ver. 1.2 or later)
is being used, and the Host Link format is 1:1 Host Link.
• Host link 1:N format/1:1 format setting: 1 (1:1 Host Link format)
• Host link model compatibility mode setting: 3 (C mode (C500/C120))
2-4-2
C-series Host Link Units with 1:1 Host Link Format Selected
Using the CPU Unit's Built-in Peripheral Port or RS-232C Port
Only the 1:N Host Link format is supported by the CPU Unit’s built-in peripheral port and RS-232C port. A host computer program cannot be used if it was
developed for a 1:1 Host Link.
Using a Pre-Ver. 1.2 Serial Communications Board or Unit
Only the 1:N Host Link format is supported by Pre-Ver. 1.2 Serial Communications Boards and Units. A host computer program cannot be used if it was
developed for a 1:1 Host Link.
Using a Serial Communications Board or Unit with Version Number 1.2 or Later
The Serial Communications Boards and Units with version number 1.2 or later
can be set to operate in 1:1 Host Link mode, so a host computer program
developed for a 1:1 Host Link with C-series PLCs (C200H, C1000H, and
C2000H) can be reused in a CS/CJ Series Host Link. (The 1:1 Host Link for-
20
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
mat can be selected with the 1:N format/1:1 format setting in the allocated DM
Area settings.)
Host link
format
1:N format
Usage
Applicable PLC models
With this Host Link
format, the connection configuration
(host: PLC) can be
either 1:1 or 1:N.
Earlier versions of
these Boards/Units
supported only the
1:N format.
C Series
SRM1 built-in ports
CPM1 built-in ports
CPM1A built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
Remarks
Only the 1:N Host Link format is supported by the built-in ports on CPU
Units of CS/CJ, C200HS, C200HX/HG/
HE, [email protected], and [email protected] PLCs as well
as the ports on Host Link Units and
Serial Communications Boards.
[email protected]@ built-in ports
C200HX/HG/[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ Communications
Board ports
CS/CJ Series
[email protected]@(-EIP) built-in ports
CS1G/[email protected]@H built-in ports
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1 built-in ports
[email protected]@H built-in ports
CJ1G/[email protected]@H built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
[email protected]@ built-in ports
Earlier versions (unit version: Pre-Ver. 1.2)
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1 Serial Communications Board ports
CS1W-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications
Unit ports
CJ1W-SCU21/41 Serial Communications
Unit ports
CVM1/CV Series
[email protected]@ built-in ports
1:1 format
With this Host Link
format, the connection configuration
(host: PLC) can be
1:1 only.
[email protected]@ built-in ports
CV500-LK201 Host Link Unit
C Series
C500-LK103/LK203 Host Link Units
3G2A5-LK101/LK201 Host Link Units
3G2A6-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
C Series
C200H-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
C Series
C500-LK103/LK203 Host Link Units
3G2A5-LK101/LK201 Host Link Units
3G2A6-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
C Series
C200H-LK101/LK201/LK202 Host Link
Units
Earlier versions of the Serial Communications Boards/Units support only the
1:N Host Link format.
Only the 1:N Host Link format is supported by the built-in ports on CPU
Units of CVM1/CV Series PLCs as well
as the ports on Host Link Units and
Serial Communications Units/Boards.
Either the 1:N Host Link or 1:1 Host
Link format can be selected with these
C-series Host Link Units.
Either the 1:N Host Link or 1:1 Host
Link format can be selected with these
C-series Host Link Units.
Note The following diagrams show the differences in the command and response
frames with the 1:N Host Link format and 1:1 Host Link format.
21
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
1:N Format
• Command
@
0
0
R
×
D
Unit number Header
in host link
code
×
FCS
*
CR
Terminator
• Response
@
0
0
R
D
Unit number Header
in host link
code
0
0
×
×
FCS
End
code
*
CR
Terminator
1:1 Format
As shown in the following diagrams, the 1:1 format is equivalent to the 1:N format without the @ character, Host Link unit number, and FCS byte.
• Command format
R
*
D
Header
code
CR
Terminator
• Response format
R
D
Header
code
2-4-3
0
0
End
code
*
CR
Terminator
C-mode Command Support
Use the following table as reference when reusing programs for host computers developed for earlier Host Link models.
• If a command is not supported for the new model of PLC, consider using
another C-mode or FINS command.
• Even if the command is supported, differences may exist in the data sizes
that can be processed or in the meaning of the values if the models or
Series vary.
• Refer to the applicable operation manuals for details.
22
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Note Refer to information on the previous page for commands with “Caution” in the
Frame data size column.
C1000HF
CQM1
SRM1
CPM1
CPM1A
---
---
---
CVM1 and
CV Series
CV500 Host Link Unit
---
C500F
CPU Unit
---
C1000H
C2000H
CPU Unit
---
C500
CPU Unit
---
---
C200H
C200HS
C200HE/
HG/HX
CPU Unit
C200HE
/HG/HX
C500 (3G2A5) Host Link Unit
C120
C200H Host Link Unit
C Series
C200HS
C120 (3G2A6) Host Link Unit
CS/CJ
Series
CPU Unit
Name
CPU Unit or
Communications Board
Header
code
CPU Unit or Serial
Communications Board or Unit
Frame
data
size
None
or V1
V2
---
Caution
RR
CIO AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
RL
LR AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Caution
RH
HR AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Caution
RC
TIMER/
COUNTER PV
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
RG
TIMER/
Yes
COUNTER
STATUS READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
RD
DM AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
RJ
AR AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OK
RE
EM AREA
READ
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
NA
RX
FILE MEMORY DELUXE
READ
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
NA
RF
FILE MEMORY READ
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
NA
CR
DM AREA
READ (FIXED)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
NA
GM
DM SIZE
CHANGE
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Caution
WR
CIO AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
WL
LR AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Caution
WH
HR AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Caution
WC
TIMER/
COUNTER PV
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
WD
DM AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Caution
WJ
AR AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OK
WE
EM AREA
WRITE
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
NA
R#
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
READ 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NA
R$
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
READ 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NA
R%
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
READ 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
NA
W#
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
CHANGE 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
23
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
SRM1
CPM1
CPM1A
CV500 Host Link Unit
---
C500F
C1000HF
CVM1 and
CV Series
CQM1
CPU Unit
---
C1000H
C2000H
CPU Unit
---
C500
CPU Unit
---
---
C200H
C200HS
C200HE/
HG/HX
CPU Unit
C200HE
/HG/HX
C500 (3G2A5) Host Link Unit
C120
C200H Host Link Unit
C Series
C200HS
C120 (3G2A6) Host Link Unit
CS/CJ
Series
CPU Unit
Name
CPU Unit or
Communications Board
Header
code
CPU Unit or Serial
Communications Board or Unit
Frame
data
size
Section 2-4
---
---
---
None
or V1
V2
---
NA
W$
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
CHANGE 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NA
W%
TIMER/
COUNTER SV
CHANGE 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
NA
MS
STATUS READ Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
SC
STATUS
CHANGE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
MF
ERROR READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
KS
FORCED SET
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
KR
FORCED
RESET
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
FK
MULTIPLE
FORCED SET/
RESET
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NA
FR
MULTIPLE
FORCED SET/
RESET STATUS READ
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
NA
KC
FORCED SET/
RESET CANCEL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
MM
PLC MODEL
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
TS
TEST
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
RP
PROGRAM
READ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
WP
PROGRAM
WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
MI
I/O TABLE
CREATE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
QQMR/
QQIR
REGISTER/
READ I/O
MEMORY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
XZ
ABORT (command only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
**
INITIALIZE
(command
only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
IC
Undefined
Yes
command
(response only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
EX
TXD
No
RESPONSE
(response only)
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
NA
FA
FINS MESSAGE
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
OF
FINS MESSAGE (slaveinitiated)
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note When using CVM1 or CV-series built-in ports or Host Link Units, the response
data format for the MS command (STATUS READ) is different from the format
for other Units. For details, refer to 4-3-23 STATUS READ – – MS.
24
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
Section 2-4
Manuals for Host Link Operations
PLC
CS/CJ Series
Product
Communications CPU Unit
commands (Cmode and FINS)
Model (suffixes omitted)
[email protected]@(-EIP)
CS1G/[email protected]@H
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1
Manual type
Reference
Manual
Catalog No.
W342-E1
Operation
Manual
W336-E1
Operation
Manual
Operation
Manual
W303-E1
Operation
Manual
System
Manual
W235-E1
Programming
Manual
Operation
Manual
W228-E1
[email protected]@H
[email protected]@
CJ1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@
C200HX/HG/HE
Serial Communications Unit/
Board
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU21/41
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU21/41
CPU Unit
C200HX/HG/[email protected]@
C200HX/HG/[email protected]@-Z
W322-E1
C200HS
CPU Unit
[email protected]@
C Series
Host Link Units
C200H-LK101/201/202
C500-LK201/203
3G2A5-LK101/103
3G2A6-LK101/201/202
CQM1
CPU Unit
[email protected]@
CPM1
CPU Unit
[email protected]@@@@
CPM1A
CPU Unit
[email protected]@@@@
Operation
Manual
W317-E1
SRM1
CPU Unit
[email protected]@
Operation
Manual
W318-E1
CVM1 and
CV Series
CPU Unit
CVM1/[email protected]@
W205-E1
Host Link Unit
CV500-LK201
Operation
Manual
W143-E1
W262-E1
25
Precautions when Reusing Programs from Earlier Models
26
Section 2-4
SECTION 3
Overview of FINS Commands
This section provides an overview of FINS commands.
3-1
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
3-2
Using FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3-2-1
Issuing and using any command (CMND (490) instruction) . . . . . .
31
3-2-2
Using with respect to a host computer connected by Host Link . . .
31
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
FINS Command and Response Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3-3-1
FINS Command Frame Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3-3-2
FINS Response Frame Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3-3-3
Individual Items in Command/Response Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Settings for Sending FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
3-4-1
FINS Command and Response Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-4-2
Addresses in FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-4-3
Other FINS Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
3-4-4
CMND(490) Setting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
3-5-1
Connection Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
3-5-2
Overview of Command and Response Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
3-5-3
Sending Commands from the Computer to the CPU Unit . . . . . . . .
45
3-5-4
Sending FINS Commands to the Host Computer from the CPU Unit
49
3-5-5
Sending Commands from the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
3-5-6
Command Format Received by the Host Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
3-5-7
Response Format Returned by the Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
3-5-8
Flags for Network Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
3-5-9
Timing of Commands to Host Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
3-5-10 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Serial Gateway Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-6-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-6-2
Types of Protocol Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
3-6-3
Converting FINS to CompoWay/F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
3-6-4
Converting FINS to Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
3-6-5
Converting from FINS to Modbus-ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
3-6-6
Converting from FINS to Host Link FINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
3-6-7
Treating Serial Communications Paths as Networks . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
3-6-8
Using a PLC as the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
3-6-9
Using a non-PLC Component as the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
3-6-10 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Communications Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
3-7-1
CompoWay/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
3-7-2
Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
3-7-3
Modbus-ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
3-7-4
Host Link FINS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
3-7-5
Sending Commands Using the CMND(490) Instruction . . . . . . . . .
90
27
FINS Commands
3-1
Section 3-1
FINS Commands
FINS commands form a command system for message services across different OMRON networks. They can be used for various control operations, such
as sending and receiving data, changing operating modes, executing forced
set and forced reset operations, performing file operations, and so on. FINS
commands make it possible to freely communicate with Units in various networks and on CPU Racks by simply specifying the network, node, and unit.
FINS commands have the following features:
1,2,3...
1. They are defined in the application level and do not depend on lower levels
(i.e., the physical and data link levels). This allows them to be used across
a variety of networks and CPU buses. Specifically, they can be used with
Ethernet, Controller Link, and Host Link networks, and between CPU Units
and CPU Bus Units.
Note FINS commands can be sent with UDP/IP headers when using
Ethernet and with Host Link command headers when using Host
Link.
2. FINS commands can be used to access various kinds of devices besides
CPU Units. Devices such as CPU Units, CPU Bus Units, personal computers (boards), and Inner Boards can be identified and specified by their unit
addresses.
CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
CPU Unit
Personal computer board
3. FINS commands support network relay operations, so they can pass
through a network hierarchy to access devices on up to three network levels (including the local network).
Network 2
Network 1
Network 3
Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, CP-series CPU
Units, or NSJ Controllers, devices can be accessed on up to 8 network levels.
When the destination of a FINS command is a CPU Unit, the command can
be sent through as many as 8 network levels. When the destination of a FINS
command is a node other than a CPU Unit, the command can be sent through
a maximum of 3 network levels.
28
FINS Commands
Section 3-1
• The following table shows the maximum number of network levels that
can be crossed by various PLC models.
PLC model
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 3.0
CP-series CPU Unit *1,
NSJ Controller
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 20. CS/CJ-series
CPU Units and CVM1/CVseries CPU Units
Network levels
(Gateway counter setting)
It is possible to select a maximum of either 8 levels or 3 levels. (Set with CX-Programmer Ver.
5.0.)
Setting fixed at 8 levels max.
Setting fixed at 3 levels max.
*1: Not possible with a CP1E CPU unit.
• When crossing up to 3 network levels, the CS/CJ-series CPU Units with
unit version 2.0 and later, CP-series CPU Units, and NSJ Controllers can
be combined with other models. When crossing 4 to 8 network levels,
configure the system with only unit version 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series
CPU Units, CP-series CPU Units, and NSJ Controllers. (Other models
cannot be combined in the network with CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit
version 2.0 and later, CP-series CPU Units, and NSJ Controllers.) If earlier models are used, a routing error (end codes 0501 to 0504) will occur
and the response may not be returned to the node that sent the command.
For details, refer to 1-4-2 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network
Levels in the CS Series PLC Operation Manual or the CJ Series PLC Operation Manual.
Types of FINS Commands
There are basically two kinds of FINS commands: Those addressed to CPU
Units and those addressed to CPU Bus Units. Among FINS commands for
CPU Units, there are commands addressed to the various models of CPU
Unit, such as the CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Units, NSJ Controllers, CV-series
CPU Units, C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units, and so on. The basic code system is
the same, but the detailed specifications vary according to the CPU Unit.
Among FINS commands for CPU Bus Units, there are commands addressed
to Controller Link Units, to DeviceNet Master Units, to Ethernet Units, and so
on.
FINS Commands
Addressed to CS/CJ/CPseries CPU Units and NSJ
Controllers
CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Units and NSJ Controllers can receive FINS commands from a PLC (CS/CJ, CVM1/CV, or C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CPU Unit) or
computer on another network or from a host computer connected directly to
the local network.
Host computer
PLC on another network
CPU
Unit
CS/CJ-series PLC
FINS command
CPU Unit
FINS command
Computer
29
Using FINS Commands
1,2,3...
Section 3-2
1. A FINS command sent from a PLC or computer on another network is
transmitted to the CPU Unit from the Backplane of the CPU Rack, via a
Communications Unit (Controller Link Unit, Ethernet Unit, etc.)
2. FINS commands sent from a host computer to a CPU Unit are sent with a
Host Link header code and a terminator (as in the Host Link communications mode).
Host computer
Communications CS1-series
Unit
CPU Unit
Serial communications (Host Link mode)
FINS command
Communications Unit
CPU Unit
PLC on network
Computer on network
Communications Board
Network (Controller Link, Ethernet, etc.)
FINS command
The FINS commands available for CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Units and NSJ Controllers fall into the following broad categories. (Refer to the relative operation
manuals for FINS commands addressed to other Units and Boards.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
I/O memory area reading and writing
Parameter area reading and writing
Program area reading and writing
Operating mode changes
Machine configuration reading
CPU Unit status reading
Time data access
Message reading and clearing
Access rights acquisition and release
Error log reading and clearing
File operations
Forced set/reset
Note When the Ethernet option board (CP1W-CF41) is used, a FINS command
issued from a PLC or computer on the network can be received via the
Ethernet option board, but cannot be issued via the Ethernet option board.
3-2
Using FINS Commands
FINS commands addressed to CPU units are issued to CS/CJ/CP-series
CPU units and NSJ Controllers by executing the instruction for the FINS command (SEND/RECV/CMND instruction) from a program of another PLC (CPU
unit) on the network.
Executing a FINS command addressed to a CPU unit can be used for the following:
• Issuing and using any command (CMND instruction)
• Using with respect to a host computer connected by Host Link
30
Using FINS Commands
3-2-1
Section 3-2
Issuing and using any command (CMND (490) instruction)
The procedure for execution by CMND instruction is described below.
1,2,3...
1. Store the command format of the FINS command (i.e., the command data)
in an I/O memory area, such as the DM area.
2. In the same way, store the control data (number of bytes of transmission
data, destination address, etc.) in an I/O memory area, such as the DM area.
3. Designate S (first command word), D (first response word), and C (first
control word) for the CMND(490) operands, and execute the instruction.
4. When the FINS response is returned from the destination node (a CS/CJ/
CP-series CPU Unit or an NSJ Controller), the data will be stored according to the response format beginning at the first response word.
1 byte
1 byte
Word
CMND(490) execution
@CMND
Command
S
Command format data
D
Control data
Response
C
1 byte
1 byte
Designates where to send, etc.
Word
Response format data
Command frame
Communications Unit
(Controller Link Unit,
etc.)
2 bytes
2,000 bytes max.
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
FINS header
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Automatically attached.
Command
code
Text
Response frame
2 bytes
2 bytes
1,998 bytes max.
FINS header
Automatically attached.
Command
code
End
code
Text
Note FINS commands and responses are handled as binary data, and data is sent
and received in binary format. (Host Link communications, however, are basically in ASCII.)
3-2-2
Using with respect to a host computer connected by Host Link
With Host Link communications, a FINS command frame with a Host Link
header and a terminator is sent from a host computer to a CS/CJ/CP-series
CPU Unit or NSJ Controller. The basic frame formats are shown below.
Note Host Link communications handle ASCII data, so data is sent and received in
ASCII. For that reason, FINS command and response frames must also be
sent and received in ASCII when they are handled using Host Link communications.
31
FINS Command and Response Frames
Section 3-3
Command Frame
Host Link header
Host Link
FCS
FINS command frame (See note.)
Host Link terminator
Note A FINS command frame also consists of the destination node address, the
source node address, and other FINS command format data.
The CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Unit or NSJ Controller that receives the command
will return the following response frame to the host computer.
Response Frame
Host Link header
Host Link
FCS
FINS response frame (See note.)
Host Link terminator
Note A FINS response frame also consists of the contents set (e.g., requested) at
the time of transmission and the FINS command response format data.
It is also possible to send a FINS command frame with a Host Link header
and terminator from a CS/CJ/CP-series (not possible from a CP1E CPU unit)
CPU Unit or NSJ Controller to a host computer connected by Host Link System (unsolicited communications initiated by a slave).
3-3
FINS Command and Response Frames
If the data from the command code onwards is set in the words specified with
S when a FINS command is sent by means of CMND(490), a FINS header will
be generated automatically and attached, and the FINS command frame will
be sent. When the FINS response frame is received, the FINS header will be
automatically removed and the response data from the command code
onwards will be stored as specified in the words specified with operand D.
When a FINS command is sent by Host Link communications, the header is
attached before the FINS frame, and the FCS and terminator are attached
after it.
3-3-1
FINS Command Frame Configuration
Command
code
Text
FINS header (automatically attached for CMND(490)) *Set in word specified for CMND(490) operand S onwards.
*With Host Link communications, the header, FCS, and terminator are attached before and after the frame.
3-3-2
FINS Response Frame Configuration
Command
code
FINS header (deleted automatically for CMND(490))
End
code
Text
*Set in word specified for CMND(490) operand D onwards.
*With Host Link communications, the header, FCS, and terminator are added before and after the frame.
32
FINS Command and Response Frames
3-3-3
Section 3-3
Individual Items in Command/Response Frames
ICF
The ICF (Information Control Field) is configured as shown in the following
diagram.
Bit
Always 0. (See note.)
Response (0: Required; 1: Not required)
Data classification (0: Command; 1: Response)
Bridges (0: Not used; 1: Used)
Always 1.
Note Set bits 01 to 05 to 0 when sending a FINS command. Do not access these
bits when receiving a FINS response.
RSV
RSV (Reserved) is always 00 hex. These bits are used by the system. Do not
access them in the response.
GCT
When communicating across up to 8 network layers with CPU Unit with unit
version 2.0 or later, set the GCT (Gateway Count: Number of Bridges Passed
Through) to 07 hex when sending a FINS command. Otherwise, set the GCT
to 02 hex (see note) when sending. When receiving a FINS response, GCT is
decremented one for each bridge (network) that is passed through and the
resulting value is received. This value is for system use; do not access it.
Note For a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later, CP-series CPU Unit,
or NSJ Controller, CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher can be used to set routing tables that start the GCT at 07 hex. For a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later, CX-Programmer (CX-Net) Ver. 5.0 or higher can be used to
set routing tables that start the GCT at either 07 Hex or 02 Hex. For details, refer
to 1-4-2 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels in the CS
Series PLC Operation Manual or the CJ Series PLC Operation Manual.
DNA
Destination network address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
Local network
01 to 7F: Remote network address (decimal: 1 to 127)
DA1
Destination node address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
Internal communications in PLC
01 to 20: Node address in Controller Link Network (1 to 32 decimal)
01 to FE:
FF:
Ethernet (1 to 254 decimal,
for Ethernet Units with model numbers ending in ETN21)
Broadcast transmission
DA2
Destination unit address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
CPU Unit
FE:
Controller Link Unit or Ethernet Unit connected to network
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit
E1:
Inner Board
SNA
Source network address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
Local network
01 to 7F: Remote network (1 to 127 decimal)
33
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Section 3-4
SA1
Source node address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
Internal communications in PLC
01 to 20: Node address in Controller Link Network (1 to 32 decimal)
01 to FE:
Ethernet (1 to 254 decimal,
for Ethernet Units with model numbers ending in ETN21)
SA2
Source unit address. Specify within the following ranges (hex).
00:
CPU Unit
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit
SID
Service ID. Used to identify the process generating the transmission. Set the
SID to any number between 00 and FF
Note
1. The unit address for a CPU Bus Unit is 10 (hexadecimal) plus the unit number set on the front panel of the CPU Bus Unit.
2. With a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0, CP-series CPU Unit,
or NSJ Controller, the GCT (Gateway Count: Number of Bridges Passed
Through) in FINS command/response frames is decremented from to 07
hex (variable). The GCT was previously decremented from 02 hex. For CS/
CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later, the GCT (Gateway Count:
Number of Bridges Passed Through) in FINS command/response frames
is decremented from to 02 hex by default. If the user specified CX-Net for
this CPU Unit version, the GCT will be decremented from 07 hex. With a
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later, NSJ Controller, or CPseries CPU Unit, the GCT will be decremented from 02 hex by default and
from 07 hex if the user selects CX-Net.
3. The GCT (Gateway Count: Number of Bridges Passed Through) in the
FINS header in FINS command/response frames should not be checked
in the user applications, e.g., in the host computer. The GCT is for system
use only and verification may fail if attempted from a user application. This
is particularly important for CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or
later, CP-series CPU Unit, or NSJ Controller.
3-4
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Command format
Settings for sending
FINS commands
Network address
Address
Node address
Unit address
Other
Response required/not required
Number of retries (See note 1.)
Communications port No. (See note 1.)
Response monitor time (See note 1.)
Gateway count (See note 2.)
Note
1. Set these as operands when executing CMND(490).
2. Do not set the gateway count when using CMND(490).
34
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
3-4-1
Section 3-4
FINS Command and Response Formats
Command Format
As shown below, the command format basically consists of the command
code (four digits hexadecimal) and parameters (text).
Command code (See note.)
4 digits hexadecimal
(2 bytes)
Text (Various kinds of data)
The length depends on the command code.
Note The command code is a 2-byte code that expresses the content of the command. A FINS command must begin with a 2-byte command code. If there is
also text, it is added after the command code.
Example: Command for Reading I/O Memory
01 01 Hex
Memory area
code
Beginning read
address
Command code
Number of
read elements
Text
The following data would read 10 words starting from D00010.
01 01 Hex
82 Hex
Command
code
Memory area
code
00 0A 00 Hex
000A Hex
First read
address
Number of
read elements
Parameters
Response Format
As shown below, the response format basically consists of the command code
(four digits hexadecimal), end code, and parameters (text).
Command code
4 digits hexadecimal
(2 bytes)
End code (See note.)
Text (Various kinds of data)
The length depends on the command code.
Note The end code is a 2-byte code that shows the command execution result.
(The first byte shows the general category, and the second byte shows the
detailed results.)
Example: Response from Reading I/O Memory
End code
01 01 Hex
Command code
Read data
End code
Text
Actual response data would be as follows:
01 01 Hex
00 00 Hex
Command
code
Response
code
Text: 10 words (20 bytes)
of read data.
35
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
3-4-2
Section 3-4
Addresses in FINS Commands
FINS commands are transmitted across networks and to various devices (via
network nodes). Designate the addresses as follows:
• Designate the device from which the command is to be sent, the network
that the device is on, and the node through which the command is to transit.
• Designate the device to which the command is to be sent, the network the
device is on, and the node through which command is to transit.
Addresses must be provided for the network, node, and device (unit) to identify them. FINS commands include these addresses (the transmission source
and destination addresses) in the command/response frames.
Addresses for FINS Commands
Address
Network address
Node address
Values
1 to 127 (01 to 7F Hex)
Local node address: 00 Hex
1 to 254 (01 to FE Hex) (See note.)
Designation method
CMND(490) operand
Designation in frame
designation
when frame is created
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note The node addresses differ for each
network.
Internal Communications in PLC: 00 Hex
For Controller Link: 01 to 3E Hex (1 to 62)
For Ethernet Units with model numbers
ending in ETN21: 01 to FE Hex (1 to 254)
For Ethernet Units with other model
numbers: 01 to 7E Hex (1 to 126)
Unit address
•CPU Unit: 00 Hex
•CPU Bus Unit: Unit No.+ 10 Hex
•Special I/O Unit: Unit No.+ 20 Hex
•Inner Board: E1 Hex
•Computer: 01 Hex
•Unit connected to network: FE Hex
Devices on the Same Network
Example
Node address 1
PLC
Node address 2
PLC
Node address 3
PLC
For CPU Unit
(00 Hex)
Address
Network address
Node address
Unit address
Source address (See note 1.)
FINS command
symbol
SNA
SA1
SA2
Note
36
Example value
00 Hex
01 Hex
00 Hex
Destination address
(See note 2.)
FINS command
Example value
symbol
DNA
00 Hex
DA1
03 Hex
DA2
00 Hex
1. The transmission source address will be automatically incorporated into
the frame if the FINS command is sent with CMND(490). If sending the
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Section 3-4
FINS command by Host Link communications, then put the source address in the message.
2. Set the transmission destination address in the control code (C) operand
if sending the FINS command with CMND(490). If sending the FINS command by Host Link communications, then put the destination address in
the message.
Devices on Different Networks
Example
Node address 1
PLC
PLC
PLC
Node address 5
PLC
Network address 1
For CPU Unit
(00 Hex)
Network address 2
Address level
Network address
Node address
Unit address
Source address (See note 1.)
FINS command
symbol
SNA
SA1
SA2
Note
Example value
01 Hex
01 Hex
00 Hex
Destination address
(See note 2.)
FINS command
Example value
symbol
DNA
02 Hex
DA1
05 Hex
DA2
00 Hex
1. The transmission source address will be automatically incorporated into
the frame if the FINS command is sent with CMND(490). If sending the
FINS command by Host Link communications, then put the source address in the message.
2. Set the transmission destination address in the control code (C) operand
if sending the FINS command with CMND(490). If sending the FINS command by Host Link communications, then put the destination address in
the message.
Unit Addresses
Set the unit address for the following purposes:
• To identify the Unit when there is more than one device connected at the
same node on a network.
• To identify the type of device (CPU Unit, CPU Bus Unit, etc.) at the destination.
Note The meanings of FINS commands will vary depending on the Unit at the destination even when the commands have the same command code. This is why
the Unit at the destination must be identified by the unit address.
Unit addresses are as follows:
• CPU Unit:
00 Hex
• CPU Bus Unit: Unit number + 10 hex
• Special I/O Unit:
Unit number + 20 hex
• Inner Board:
E1 Hex (CS Series only)
• Computer:
01 Hex
• Communications Unit with the specified node address connected to network with the specified network address (Controller Link or Ethernet):
FE Hex
37
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Unit address
Contents
00 Hex
Section 3-4
Unit No. + 10 Hex
Node
address
E1 Hex
01 Hex
Node
address
Node
address
Node
address
Note It is also possible to set the serial port (No. 1 to 4) for the destination device.
Serial Communications Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Unit Addresses for
Computers Connected to
Serial Ports
Serial Communications
Board
CPU Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
The unit addresses for host computers connected to a CS/CJ/CP/NSJ serial
port (e.g., on a CPU Unit, Option Board, Serial Communications Unit, or
Serial Communications Board) are shown in the following table.
Unit/Board
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
NSJ Controller
Peripheral port
FD Hex (253 decimal)
---
Built-in serial ports of
N-type CP1E CPU Units
---
RS-232C port
FC Hex (252 decimal)
FC Hex (Serial port C on
Controller Section)
---(See note.)
Unit/Board
CS/CJ -series Serial
Communications Board
CS/CJ-series Serial
Communications Unit
CP-series Option Board
(See Note.)
Serial port 1
E4 Hex
Serial port 2
E5 Hex
80 Hex + 04 Hex x unit
number
FD Hex
81 Hex + 04 Hex x unit
number
FC Hex
Note A FINS command to a host computer cannot be issued from a CP1E CPU unit.
For the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, the CPU Unit will add the proper unit
address based on the unit address of the Unit/Board and the specified serial port. It
is not necessary to consider these addresses in the ladder-diagram program.
Unit Addresses for Serial
Ports on Serial
Communications Boards
and Units
The network address and serial port's unit address must be allocated and the routing table's local
network table must be created for Several settings are required when making network settings
(FINS command system settings) for serial communications through a serial port on a CS Series
Serial Communications Board or CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Unit. The network
address and the serial port's unit address (permanent) must be allocated and the routing table's
local network table must be created. The following diagrams show serial port's unit address.
• Example 1: Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Serial port on Board
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
38
Serial port's unit address
E4 hex (228 decimal)
E5 hex (229 decimal)
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Section 3-4
• Example 2: Serial Communications Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Serial port on Unit Serial port's unit address
Serial port 1
80 hex + 04 hex × unit number
Serial port 2
81 hex + 04 hex × unit number
Unit addresses for serial port 1:
Unit number
Hexadecimal
Decimal
0
80
128
1
84
132
2
88
136
3
8C
140
4
90
144
5
94
148
Example: Unit number 1
80 hex + 04 hex × 1 = 84
hex (132 decimal)
81 hex + 04 hex × 1 = 85
hex (132 decimal)
6
98
152
7
9C
156
8
A0
160
9
A4
164
A
A8
168
B
AC
172
C
B0
176
D
B4
180
E
B8
184
F
BC
188
6
99
153
7
9D
157
8
A1
161
9
A5
165
A
A9
169
B
AD
173
C
B1
177
D
B5
181
E
B9
185
F
BD
189
Unit addresses for serial port 2:
Unit number
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Summary of Addresses
0
81
129
1
85
133
2
89
137
3
8D
141
4
91
145
5
95
149
The three addresses used in FINS commands can be summarized as follows
(refer to the following diagram):
Network Address
An address that identifies the entire network. All nodes on the same network
have the same network address.
Node Address
An address that identifies an individual node on a network, such as a PLC or
host computer.
39
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
Section 3-4
Unit Address
For a PLC, an address that identifies the specific Unit that is participating in
the communication in the PLC. For a host computer, an address that identifies
the specific application that is participating in the communication in the computer.
Computer
Node address: 1
PLC
Node address: 5
Controller Link Unit
Unit address: 12 Hex
PLC
Node address: 8
Ethernet network
Network address 1
Node address: 8
PLC
Node address: 7
Controller Link Network
Network address 2
PLC
Node address: 3
Computer
Node address: 11
Communications Unit
(Controller Link Unit)
Unit address: 12 Hex
PLC
Node address: 2
Ethernet Unit
Unit address:
15 Hex
CPU Unit
Unit address:
0 Hex
Unit address of
serial port 2 of the
Serial Communications Unit: 81
Hex + 04 Hex ×
unit number
Serial
communications
(Host Link)
PLC
Node address: 5
Serial Communications Unit
PLC
Node address: (Host
Link unit number (0
to 31) + 1
RS-232C port on
CPU Unit
40
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
3-4-3
Section 3-4
Other FINS Command Settings
Aside from the addresses, the following data must be set.
Setting
Content
Number of retries Number of times to retry sending
the command.
Port No.
Logical communications port. CS/
CJ/CP-series CPU Units have 8
communications ports, so 8 communications commands can be
executed simultaneously. To execute 9 or more commands, simultaneously, it is necessary to set up
exclusive control.
Serial port No.
Specifies the number of the serial
port of the Unit with Host Link
capabilities.
Response monitor time
Response
required/ not
required
(ICF bit 0)
Gateway count
Values
0 to F Hex (0 to 15 times)
Designation method
CMND(490)
Designation in
operand
frame when
designation frame is created
Yes
No
0 to 7 Hex
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0: Unit/Board
1: Serial port 1 for Serial
Communications Board/
Unit or Peripheral port for
CPU Unit
2: Serial port 2 for Serial
Communications Board/
Unit or RS-232C port for
CPU Unit
Monitors the time it takes to return 0001 to FFFF Hex (0.1 to
6,553.5 seconds)
a response. If a response is not
returned within the designated
time, a response timeout is generated.
Designates whether or not a
0 or 1 (bit)
response is required.
Designates the number of networks that can be accessed.
Note
00 to 07 Hex
1. Unit address are fixed for Units and Boards, as well as for serial ports. For
the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, the CPU Unit
will add the proper unit address based on the unit address of the Unit/
Board and the specified serial port. It is not necessary to consider these
addresses in the ladder-diagram program.
Serial Port 1:
80 Hex + 04 Hex x unit number for Serial Communications Units, E4 Hex for
Serial Communications Boards, and FC Hex (CPU Unit’s RS-232C or serial port 2 on CP1H Option Board)
Serial Port 2:
81 Hex + 04 Hex x unit number for Serial Communications Units, E5 Hex for
Serial Communications Boards, and FD Hex (CPU Units peripheral port or
serial port 1 on CP1H Option Board)
2. The gateway count is decremented one for each bridge (network) that is
passed through.
41
Settings for Sending FINS Commands
3-4-4
Section 3-4
CMND(490) Setting Example
The designated number of bytes of FINS command data from the first command word designated by operand S is sent to the designated unit address
via the node address on the network address designated by operand C, and
the response is stored for the number of bytes of data received starting from
D.
S: First command word
D: First response word
C: First control word
In this example, a command (MEMORY AREA READ: 0101 Hex) for reading
D00010 to D00019 of the PLC at node 02 is sent using CMND(490).
D00010: Memory area code (82 Hex), address 000A00
Number of elements read: 10 = 0A Hex
S: First command word
01
01
C: First control word
00
Command code
82
00
Number of command data bytes
00
00
Beginning read address
00
0A
01
01
Control code
00
00
End code
Read data
Read data
42
00
Destination network address
Serial port No.
02
Number of elements read
D: First response word
18
Number of response data bytes
Beginning read address
Memory area code
0A 00
08
00
Destination unit address
Destination node address
00
03
Number of retries
Communications port number
Response required/not required
00
00
Response monitor time
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
3-5
Section 3-5
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
FINS commands can be sent and received using the Host Link protocol
between interconnected host computers and PLCs.
3-5-1
Connection Configurations
One of the following two methods can be used to send and receive FINS commands using the Host Link protocol.
Sending from a Computer to a CPU Unit
Note The host computer can be connected to the peripheral port or RS-232C port
on the CPU Unit or to a serial ports on a Serial Communications Unit/Board.
The Host Link protocol must be used regardless of the point of connection.
CPU Unit Directly Connected to Host Computer
CPU Unit
Host Link
FINS command
CPU Units on a Network
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Host Link
FINS command
Network (Controller Link, Ethernet, etc.)
Sending from a CPU Unit to a Computer (Slave Initiation)
Note
1. Slave initiation is not possible from a CP1E CPU.
2. The host computer can be connected to the peripheral port or RS-232C
port on the CPU Unit or to a serial ports on a Serial Communications Unit/
Board. The Host Link protocol must be used regardless of the point of connection.
CPU Unit Directly Connected to Host Computer
SEND(090)
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
CPU Unit
Host Link
FINS command
43
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
CPU Unit Directly Connected to Host Computer on a Network
SEND(090)
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Host Link
FINS command
Network (Controller Link, Ethernet, etc.)
Note
1. Host Link communications handle ASCII data, so data is sent and received
in ASCII. Hexadecimal values in FINS command and response frames
must, therefore, also be sent and received in ASCII when they are handled
using Host Link communications.
2. When a FINS command sent from a host computer or the CPU Unit (with
the CMND instruction) is received by a Serial Communications Board or
Unit with version number Ver. 1.2 or later, that PLC acts as the Host Link
Master and it can send the FINS command to a Slave PLC through the
Host Link system.
3. When the Ethernet option board (CP1W-CF41) is used, a FINS command
cannot be issued to Host Link via the Ethernet option board.
Serial Communications Unit
Ver. 1.2 or later
Serial
Gateway
Sends FINS command
CMND
FINS
FINS
PLC (Host link Master)
FINS
Host link
header
Host link
header
Host link
terminator
Host link
terminator
PLC (Host link Slave)
3-5-2
Overview of Command and Response Frames
When FINS commands and responses are sent or received using Host Link
communications, the frame must be preceded by a Host Link header and followed by a Host Link FCS and terminator as shown below.
Command Frame
Host Link header
Use the following format to send FINS command frames.
FINS command frame (See note.)
Host Link
FCS
Host Link terminator
Note A FINS command frame also consists of the response wait time, the destination node address, the source node address, and other FINS command format data.
44
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Response Frame
Section 3-5
The CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Unit or NSJ Controller that receives the command
will return the following response frame to the host computer.
Host Link header
Host Link
FCS
FINS response frame (See note.)
Host Link terminator
Note A FINS response frame also consists of the contents set at the time of transmission and the FINS command response format data.
3-5-3
Sending Commands from the Computer to the CPU Unit
Command Format from Host Computer
Use the following command format to send FINS commands from the host
computer to the CPU Unit.
Note The length of the command must be not more than 1,114 characters. FINS
commands cannot be partitioned into separate frames for sending.
Sending Commands to a CPU Unit Directly Connected to the Host Computer
Note The following format is also applicable for a host computer connected to a
Serial Communications Board or a Serial Communications Unit.
x
x
x
ICF
Header
Response
code
wait time
Unit No.
x
x
x
x
DA2
SA2
x
x
Text
(1,080 characters = 540 bytes max.)
FINS command code
x
SID
x
FCS
*
Terminator
Sending Commands to a CPU Unit on a Network
Note The following format can also be used to send FINS commands to a CPU Unit
connected to the host computer.
x
x
x
Header
code
Unit No.
x
7
Response ICF
wait time
x
x
DA2
x
SNA
x
FCS
Host Link Settings
RSV
SA1
*
SA2
x
SID
x
GCT
x
x
x
DNA
x
x
x
DA1
x
FINS command code
Text
(1,080 characters =
540 bytes max.)
Terminator
@
The @ symbol must be attached to the beginning of the command.
Unit Number
The unit number set is that of the destination CPU Unit connected to the host
45
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
computer. When the host computer is connected to a CPU Unit, the unit number is designated in the PLC Setup.
When the host computer is connected to a Serial Communications Board or a
Serial Communications Unit, the unit number is the designated in the Setup
for the Board or Unit.
Header Code
The header code distinguishes between different types of commands. Set
“FA” (ASCII: 46, 41) when using FINS commands.
Response Wait Time
The response wait time sets the time from when the CPU Unit receives a
command block until it starts to return a response. It can be set from 0 to F in
hexadecimal, in units of 10 ms.
Example:
If F(15) is set, the response will begin to be returned 150 ms (15 × 10 ms)
after the command block was received.
ICF (Information Control Field)
Specifies whether or not there are network relays. Set “80” (ASCII: 38,30)
when sending an FINS command to a CPU Unit on a network. Set “00”
(ASCII: 30,30) when sending to a CPU Unit connected directly to the host
computer.
RSV (Reserved)
Set “00” (ASCII: 30,30). Setting RSV is required only when sending to a CPU
Unit on a network.
GCT (Gateway Count)
This is the number of networks through which the transmission can be
relayed. Set “07” (ASCII: 30, 37). Setting GCT is required only when sending
to a CPU Unit on a network.
DNA, DA1, DA2
Set the destination network, node, and unit addresses.
DNA (Destination Network Address)
Set between 00 and 7F Hex (0 and 127 decimal). Setting DNA is required
only when sending to a CPU Unit on a network.
DA1 (Destination Node Address)
Set within the following ranges. Setting DA1 is required only when sending
to a CPU Unit on a network.
Ethernet Units with model numbers ending in ETN21:
01 to FE hex (1 to 254)
Ethernet Units with other model numbers:
01 to 7E hex (1 to 126)
Controller Link Unit:
01 to 20 hex (1 to 32 decimal)
SYSMAC NET:
01 to 7E hex (1 to 126 decimal)
SYSMAC LINK:
01 to 3E hex (1 to 62 decimal)
DA2 (Destination Unit Address)
Refer to 3-4-2 Addresses in FINS Commands for details on unit addresses.
In Host Link mode, it is assumed that the destination unit is the CPU Unit,
so set “00” (ASCII: 30, 30).
SNA (Source Network Address), SA1 (Source Node Address)
Set the source network and node addresses. Set both to “00” (ASCII: 30, 30)
regardless of whether or not there is a network relay.
46
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Setting SNA and SN1 is required only when sending to a CPU Unit on a network.
SA2 (Source Unit Address)
Set the unit address of the Unit physically connected to the host computer.
The setting changes depending on the connected Unit.
When connected to the CPU Unit, Serial Communications Board, or a Serial
Communications Unit, set “00” to indicate the CPU Unit (ASCII: 30, 30).
SID (Source ID)
The SID is used as a counter when resending. It should normally be set to
“00” (ASCII: 30, 30).
Command Code, Text
Set the command code and text according to the FINS command and
response formats.
FCS (Frame Check Sequence)
Set a 2-character FCS. Refer to FCS Calculations under 2-2 Command/
Response Formats for the FCS calculation method.
Terminator
The terminator is a required delimiter at the end of a command. Set the terminator to *CR (ASCII: 2A, 0D).
Response Format from a CPU Unit
The following response format is used to return responses from the CPU Unit
to the host computer.
Note The length of the response must be not more than 1,115 characters. Of this,
the response data without the response code is 1,076 characters (538 bytes).
Responses from a CPU Unit Directly Connected to the Host Computer
x
x
x
Header
code
Unit No.
x
x
x
x
ICF
x
x
x
SA2
x
SID
x
FINS response code
FINS command code
DA2
x
FCS
Data
(1,076 characters
= 538 bytes)
x
*
Terminator
Responses from a CPU Unit on a Network
x
x
x
Unit No.
x
DA2
Header
code
x
x
SNA
ICF
x
SA1
x
Data
(1,076 characters
= 538 bytes)
x
x
SA2
x
FCS
RSV
x
x
SID
x
x
GCT
x
x
DNA
x
x
DA1
x
x
x
FINS command code FINS response code
*
Terminator
47
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Host Link Settings
Section 3-5
@
The @ symbol must be attached to the beginning of the response.
Unit Number and Header Code
The same unit number and header code specified in the FINS command that
was received will be returned.
ICF (Information Control Field)
For a CPU Unit on a network, “C0” (ASCII: 43, 30) will be returned. For a CPU
Unit connected directly to the host computer, “40” (ASCII: 34,30) will be
returned.
RSV (Reserved)
This section is reserved for the system. Do not access the RSV.
GCT (Gateway Count)
This section is reserved for the system. Do not access the GCT. The same
GCT that was specified in the command that was received will be returned.
Setting GCT is required in the response format only from a CPU Unit on a network.
DNA (Destination Network Address), DA1 (Destination Node Address),
DA2 (Destination Unit Address)
The same contents specified for SNA, SA1, and SA2 in the command that
was received will be returned.
Setting DNA and DA1 is required for response formats only from a CPU Unit
on a network.
SNA (Source Network Address), SA1 (Source Node Address), SA2
(Source Unit Address)
The same contents specified for DNA, DA1, and DA2 in the command that
was received will be returned.
Setting SNA and SN1 is required for response formats only from a CPU Unit
on a network.
SID (Source ID)
The SID that was specified in the command that was received will be
returned.
Command Code, Response Code, Text
The command code, response code, and text corresponding to the FINS command and response formats will be returned.
FCS (Frame Check Sequence)
A 2-character FCS will be returned. Refer to FCS Calculations under 2-2
Command/Response Formats for the FCS calculation method.
Terminator
The terminator is a required delimiter at the end of a command. The terminator *CR (ASCII: 2A, 0D) will be returned.
Example: FINS Command Settings for Sending to CPU Unit on a Network
With Host Link communications, FINS command transmissions and receptions are handled in ASCII, so hexadecimal values in FINS command frames
must be sent as ASCII. For example, the hexadecimal value “0” would be “30
Hex” in ASCII, and the hexadecimal value “A” would be “41 Hex” in ASCII.
The destination network address, node address, and unit number address are
explained using the following network as an example.
48
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Ethernet network, network address 10
Host computer
Ethernet Unit
Node 10
Host Link
Controller Link
Unit
Node 3
PLC (A)
Ethernet Unit
Node 12
PLC (B)
Controller Link, network address 5
Sending a Command from a Host Computer to PLC (A)
The following addresses are specified to the CPU Unit at network address 5,
node address 3:
Destination network address (DNA):
Destination node address (DA1):
Destination unit address (DA2):
(Command addressed to CPU Unit)
05 (30, 35)
03 (30, 33)
00 (30, 30)
Sending a Command from a Host Computer to PLC (B)
The following addresses are specified to the CPU Unit at network address 10,
node address 12:
Destination network address (DNA):
Destination node address (DA1):
Destination unit address (DA2):
(Command addressed to CPU Unit)
3-5-4
0A (30, 41)
0C (30, 43)
00 (30, 30)
Sending FINS Commands to the Host Computer from the CPU
Unit
With normal Host Link communications, FINS commands are sent from the
host computer to the CPU Unit. Commands can also be sent, however, from
the CPU Unit to the host computer. Any FINS command can be sent to the
host computer using SEND(090), which sends CPU Unit data to the host
computer, RECV(098), which receives data from the host computer, or
CMND(490).
Slave-initiated communications allows the host computer to be notified (unsolicited communications) when an error is generated, for example, on a production line controlled by a CPU Unit. Since the host computer no longer needs to
regularly communicate with the CPU Unit, the load on the host computer is
reduced.
When an Ethernet Unit or Controller Link Unit are mounted to the Backplane
of the CPU Unit, commands can be sent to the host computer from a CPU
Unit on a network on another level (up to three network levels).
Note In principle, send commands to the host computer only when one host computer is connected to one CPU Unit. If more than one CPU Unit is connected
to the host computer, the commands may collide with each other and prevent
normal communications. Create a program that will exclusively control commands that are being sent to a host computer to which multiple CPU Units are
connected.
Considerations when Sending Commands from a CPU Unit
Consider the following items when using instructions (SEND(090),
RECV(098), and CMND (490)) to send commands from the CPU Unit.
49
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
1,2,3...
Section 3-5
1. SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND (490) executed by the CPU Unit are
converted to the same format for FINS commands that are sent to CPU
Units on networks.
2. A program must be created to process the commands received by the host
computer.
3. When instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND (490)) are executed in a CPU Unit, some of the control data settings will be different. Refer to the relevant instruction specifications.
3-5-5
Sending Commands from the CPU Unit
When controls are being implemented by sending commands from the local
CPU Unit or another CPU Unit on a network to a host computer, three instructions can be used in the user program: SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490).
Send(090)
Memory area data can be sent from the CPU Unit to the host computer by
using SEND(090).
Command Format Received by the Host Computer
The FINS command transmitted to the host computer when SEND(090) is
executed is MEMORY AREA WRITE (command code 0102). The command
format received by the host computer is as shown in the following diagram.
Refer to MEMORY AREA WRITE: 0102 in Section 5 FINS Commands for
details.
x
x
x
Unit No.
Header
ICF
code Response
wait time
x
x
x
DA2
x
x
x
x
SNA
x
x
x
x
SA1
x
Beginning
write address
x
x
RSV
x
SA2
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
GCT
x
DNA
x
SID
x
x
Number of write
elements
x
DA1
x
Command code
x
x
Memory area
code
*
x
FCS
Write data
(1,068 characters max.)
x
Terminator
Control Words
Control data must be set before SEND(090) is executed. The control data is
written in the following format, starting from the first control word.
Word
C
C+1
C+2
C+3
Bits 00 to 07
Number of send words
Destination network address
Destination unit address
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
C+4
Response monitor time (unit: 0.1 s)
Bits 08 to 15
Bits 08 to 10: Serial port number
Destination node address
Bits 08 to 10: Comm. port number
Bit 15: Response setting
Number of Send Words
Set the total number of words of data to be transferred to the host computer.
50
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Serial Port Number
Set the serial port number to which the host computer is connected.
Destination Network Address
Set the network address of the destination node. Set “00” to send communications within the local network.
Destination Node Address
Set the node address of the destination node. Set “00” when transmitting
within the local PLC.
Destination Unit Address
Set the unit address of the Unit to which the host computer is connected.
Response Setting
Normally this bit is set to 0 to require a response. When a response is not
required, set this bit to 1.
Communications Port Number
Set the port number in the CPU Unit which will transmit SEND(090).
Number of Retries
Set the maximum number of times SEND(090) is to be resent if no response is returned.
Response Monitor Time
If the Response Setting is set to require a response, set the response monitor time.
Control Word Settings
The setting range for each item is shown on the following table.
Item
Number of send words
Serial port number
Setting
0001 to 010B (1 to 267 words)
00: Do not set.
01: Port 1
02: Port 2
Destination network
address
00:
Local network
01 to 7F: Network address (1 to 127)
Destination node address 00:
Internal communications in PLC
01 to FE: Node address of Ethernet Unit with model
number ending in ETN21 (1 to 254)
01 to 7E: Node address of Ethernet Unit with other
model number (1 to 126)
01 to 20: Node address (1 to 32) for Controller Link
Destination unit address 00: CPU Unit
10 to 1F: Serial Communications Unit (unit address 0 to
15)
E1: Inner Board (Serial Communications Board)
Response setting
0: Required
1: Not required
Communications port
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
number
Number of retries
0 to F (0 to 15)
Response monitor time
0000:
Default
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s (unit 0.1 s)
51
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Note To execute SEND(090) normally, programming needs to be written to process
the data received by the host computer and return the proper response.
RECV(098)
By using RECV(098), data from the host computer can be written to a memory area in the CPU Unit.
Command Format Received by the Host Computer
The FINS command transmitted to the host computer when RECV(098) is
executed is MEMORY AREA READ (command code 0101). The command
format received by the host computer is shown in the following diagram.
Refer to MEMORY AREA READ: 0101 in Section 5 FINS Commands for
details
x
x
x
Unit No.
Header
ICF
code Response
wait time
x
x
x
DA2
x
x
x
x
SNA
x
x
x
x
SA1
x
x
x
x
RSV
x
SA2
x
Beginning
read address
x
x
x
x
GCT
x
x
Number of read
elements
x
DNA
x
SID
x
x
DA1
x
Command code
x
x
FCS
x
x
Memory area
code
*
Terminator
Control Words
Control data must be set before RECV(098) is executed. The control data is
written in the following format, starting from the first control word.
Word
C
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
Bits 00 to 07
Number of read words
Destination network address
Destination unit address
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
Response monitor time (unit: 0.1 s)
Bits 08 to 15
Bits 08 to 10: Serial port number
Destination node address
Bits 08 to 10: Comm. port number
Number of Read Words
Set the total number of words of data to be read from the host computer.
Serial Port Number
Set the serial port number to which the host computer is connected.
Destination Network Address
Set the network address of the destination node (i.e., the computer). Set
“00” to send communications within the local network.
Destination Node Address
Set the node address of the destination node (i.e., the computer). Set “00”
when transmitting within the local PLC.
Destination Unit Address
Set the unit address of the Unit to which the host computer is connected.
Communications Port Number
Set the port number in the CPU Unit which will transmit RECV(098).
52
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Number of Retries
Set the maximum number of times RECV(098) is to be resent if no response is returned.
Response Monitor Time
Set the time to wait for a response
Control Word Settings
The setting range for each item is shown on the following table.
Item
Number of read words
Serial port number
Setting
0001 to 010D (1 to 269 words)
00: CPU Unit, Inner Board, CPU Bus Unit
01: Port 1
02: Port 2
Destination network
address
00:
Local network
01 to 7F:Network address (1 to 127)
Destination node address 00:
Internal communications in PLC
01 to FE: Node address of Ethernet Unit with model
number ending in ETN21 (1 to 254)
01 to 7E: Node address of Ethernet Unit with other
model number (1 to 126)
01 to 3E: Node address (1 to 62) for Controller Link
Destination unit address 00:
CPU Unit
10 to 1F: Serial Communications Unit (unit address 0 to
15)
E1:
Inner Board (Serial Communications Board)
Response required/not
0: Response required
required
1: Response not required
Communications port
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
number
Number of retries
0 to F (0 to 15)
Response monitor time
0000:
Default
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s (unit 0.1 s)
Note To execute RECV(098) normally, programming needs to be written to process
the command received by the host computer and return the proper data.
CMND(490)
By using CMND(490), controls can be implemented by sending FINS commands to the host computer.
Command Format Received by the Host Computer
CMND(490) can be used to send any FINS command to the host computer
The command format received by the host computer is shown in the following
diagram.
53
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
x
x
Section 3-5
x
x
Unit No.
Header
ICF
Response
code
wait time
x
x
x
DA2
x
x
SNA
x
FCS
x
x
SA1
x
x
x
RSV
x
SA2
x
SID
x
GCT
x
x
x
DNA
x
x
x
DA1
x
Command code
Data (1,080
characters
max.)
*
Terminator
Control Words
Control data must be set before CMND(490) is executed. The control data is
written in the following format, starting from the first control word.
Word
C
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
Bits 00 to 07
Number of bytes of command data
Number of bytes of response data
Destination network address
Destination unit address
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
C+5
Response monitor time
Bits 08 to 15
Bits 08 to 10: Serial port number
Destination node address
Bits 08 to 10: Comm. port number
Bits 15: Response setting
Number of Bytes of Command Data
Set the number of bytes of command data (including the command code)
that are stored from the first command word
Number of Bytes of Response Data
Set the number of bytes of response data (including command code and
end code) that are stored from the first response word.
Serial Port Number
Set the serial port number to which the host computer is connected.
Destination Network Address
Set the network address of the destination node (i.e., the computer). Set
“00” to send communications within the local network.
Destination Node Address
Set the node address of the destination node (i.e., the computer). Set “00”
when transmitting within the local PLC.
Destination Unit Address
Set the unit address of the Unit to which the host computer is connected.
Response Setting
Normally this bit is set to 0 to require a response. When a response is not
required, set this bit to 1.
Communications Port Number
Set the port number in the CPU Unit which will transmit CMND(490).
54
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Number of Retries
Set the maximum number of times CMND(490) is to be resent if no response is returned.
Response Monitor Time
If the Response Setting is set to require a response, set the response monitor time.
Note If response data longer than that set in the Number of Bytes of Response
Data is returned, all extra response data will not be stored. If response data
shorter than that set in the Number of Bytes of Response Data is returned,
the response data will be stored, and the remaining area will stay at its previous values.
Control Word Settings
The setting range for each item is shown on the following table.
Item
Number of bytes of command data
Number of bytes of
response data
Serial port number
Setting
0002 to 021E (2 to 542 bytes)
Destination network
address
00:
0002 to 021E (2 to 542 bytes)
00: CPU Unit, Inner Board, CPU Bus Unit
01: Port 1
02: Port 2
Local network
01 to 7F:Network address (1 to 127)
Destination node address 00:
Internal communications in PLC
01 to FE: Node address of Ethernet Unit with model
number ending in ETN21 (1 to 254)
01 to 7E: Node address of Ethernet Unit with other
model number (1 to 126)
01 to 3E: Node address (1 to 62) for Controller Link
Destination unit address 10 to 1F: Serial Communications Unit (unit address 0 to
15)
Response setting
0: Required
1: Not required
Communications port
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
number
Number of retries
0 to F (0 to 15)
Response monitor time
0000:
Default (2 s)
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
Note To execute CMND(490) normally, programming needs to be written to process
the command received by the host computer and return the proper response.
3-5-6
Command Format Received by the Host Computer
FINS commands sent to the host computer are received at the host computer
in the format shown below.
55
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
x
x
Section 3-5
x
Unit No.
Header
ICF
Response
code
wait time
x
x
x
DA2
x
SNA
x
FCS
x
x
x
x
SA1
x
x
SA2
x
x
RSV
x
x
x
x
GCT
x
SID
x
x
DNA
x
x
x
DA1
x
Command code
Text (1,080
characters
max.)
*
Terminator
Unit Number
The unit number of the Host Link port connected to the host computer is set.
Header Code
The header code in FINS commands sent to the host computer is always set
to “OF” (ASCII: 4F, 46).
Response Wait Time
The response wait time in FINS commands sent to the host computer is fixed
at to “0” (ASCII: 4F, 46).
ICF (Information Control Field)
Specifies whether or not a response is required.
Response required: “80” (ASCII: 38,30)
Response not required: “81” (ASCII: 38,31)
RSV (Reserved)
Always set to “00” (ASCII: 30,30) in commands sent to the host computer.
GCT (Gateway Count)
The number of networks through which the command is relayed subtracted
from 2 is set. (See note.)
Number of networks = 0: “02” (ASCII: 30, 32)
Number of networks = 1: “01” (ASCII: 30, 31)
Number of networks = 2: “00” (ASCII: 30, 30)
Number of networks = 7: “07” (ASCII: 30, 37)
Note The number of networks is subtracted from 7 for a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
with unit version 2.0 or later, CP-series CPU Unit, or NSJ Controller.
DNA, DA1, DA2
The addresses for the Host LInk Unit connected to the host computer are set.
DNA (Destination Network Address)
The network address (00 to 7F Hex) of the CPU Unit is set in hexadecimal.
DA1 (Destination Node Address)
The node address (01 to 7E Hex) of the CPU Unit is set in hexadecimal.
DA2 (Destination Unit Address)
The unit address of the Host Link port is set.
SNA, SA1, SA2
The addresses for the source node (e.g., PLC, FA computer) are set.
SNA (Source Network Address)
The network address (00 to 7F Hex) of the source is set in hexadecimal.
56
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
SA1 (Source Node Address)
The node address (01 to 7E Hex) of the source is set in hexadecimal.
SA2 (Source Unit Address)
The unit address of the source is set.
SID (Source ID)
Automatically set by the CPU Unit using SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490).
3-5-7
Response Format Returned by the Host Computer
Responses to FINS commands received by the host computer are returned in
the format shown below.
x
x
Unit No.
x
x
DA2
x
x
x
7
Header
code
x
ICF
x
SNA
x
x
SA1
x
Data
(1,076 characters)
x
SA2
x
FCS
RSV
x
x
SID
x
x
GCT
x
x
x
x
DNA
x
x
x
DA1
x
x
x
FINS command code FINS response code
*
Terminator
ICF (Information Control Field)
“C0” (ASCII: 43, 30) will be returned.
RSV (Reserved)
“00” (ASCII: 30, 30) is returned.
GCT (Gateway Count)
“07” (ASCII: 30, 37) is returned.
DNA (Destination Network Address), DA1 (Destination Node Address),
DA2 (Destination Unit Address)
The same contents specified for SNA, SA1, and SA2 in the command that
was received will be returned.
SNA (Source Network Address), SA1 (Source Node Address), SA2
(Source Unit Address)
The same contents specified for DNA, DA1, and DA2 in the command that
was received will be returned.
SID (Source ID)
The SID that was specified in the command that was received will be
returned.
Command Code
The command code that was specified in the command that was received will
be returned.
Note The length of the response cannot exceed 1,115 characters. Create
responses so that the response data without the response code is less than
1,076 characters (538 bytes).
57
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
3-5-8
Section 3-5
Flags for Network Communications
This section describes the flags in the Auxiliary Area that are used when executing SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490).
Communications Port
Enabled Flags
A Communications Port Enabled Flag turns ON when SEND(090),
RECV(098), and CMND(490) can be executed. The Flag will turn OFF during
execution of these commands and turn ON again when the command execution is completed. When creating the ladder diagram, use these Flags as input
conditions when executing these instructions.
Word
A202
Communications Port
Error Flags
Bit
08 to 15
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Content
Reserved
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 7
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 6
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 5
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 4
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 3
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 2
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 1
Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 0
A Communications Port Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases.
• When an error is generated during execution of SEND(090), RECV(098),
or CMND(490).
• When an error response or retry error has been generated for the port.
These Flags will turn OFF when the corresponding Communications Port
Enabled Flag is turned OFF at the start of operation or at the start of executing the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490).
Word
A219
58
Bit
15 to 08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Content
Reserved
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 7
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 6
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 5
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 4
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 3
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 2
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 1
Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 0
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Communications Port
Completion Codes
Section 3-5
The Communication Port Completion Code words will contain the FINS end
code after SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) has been executed.
If the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF when operation is started
or SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) are executed, the contents of
these words will be cleared.
Word
A203
A204
A205
A206
A207
A208
A209
A210
A211 to A218
Content
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 0
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 1
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 2
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 3
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 4
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 5
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 6
Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 7
Reserved
Flag Transitions
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Command 1
being
executed
Network communications instructions
(SEND(090)/RECV(098)/CMND(490))
Command 2
being
executed
Command 3
being
executed
Communications Port Error Flag
Communications end code
Normal end
End of previous
processing
Normal end
(No unit corresponding to unit address)
3-5-9
Timing of Commands to Host Computers
Commands sent to a host computer are transmitted with the timing shown
below.
Data Received from Host Computer
Response Required
Host computer
Serial Communications
Board/Unit
Command
(1) Command
Response (2)
Response
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command completed
No Response Required
Host computer
Serial Communications
Board/Unit
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command
(1) Command
(2)
Response
Command completed
59
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Command transmission to the host computer can commence even when the
port is receiving a command from the host computer (1). The transmission of
a response to the command from the host computer is postponed until the
transmission of the command to the host computer is completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
Host Computer Receiving Data
Response Required
Host computer
(1)
(2)
Response
Command
Command
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Response
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command completed
No Response Required
Host computer
Serial Communications Board/Unit
(2)
(1)
Command
Response
Command
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command completed
At (1) in the diagram, the response to a command sent from the host computer is being transmitted from the port. In this case, the command transmission to the host computer is postponed until the response transmission is
completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
60
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Response Wait Time
Response Required
Host computer
Command
Response
(1) Command
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Response wait time
Response
(2)
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command completed
No Response Required
Host computer
Command
Serial Communications Board/Unit
(1) Command
Response wait time
Response
(2)
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Command acknowledged
Command completed
When response wait time has been set in the command format from the host
computer, commands to the host computer will not be transmitted until the
response time has elapsed (1). Transmission of responses to commands from
the host computer will be postponed until the command transmission to the
host computer has been completed.
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
61
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
3-5-10 Programming Example
0000
00
A202
04
0128
02
(011)
KEEP 012800
(1)
0128
01
0128
00
(021)
@MOV
#000A
D00000
(021)
@MOV
#0100
D00001
#0000
D00002
#0405
D00003
#0000
D00004
(070)
@XFER #000A
0100
D00010
(3)
(090)
@SENDD00010
D00020
D00000
(4)
(013)
DIFU
012801
(021)
@MOV
(021)
@MOV
(021)
@MOV
0128
00
A202
04
0128
00
A219
04
Main execution
condition
0000
A202
01
04
0002
00
(2)
(5)
(6)
0128
02
(011)
KEEP 012802
(7)
0128
03
0128
02
(021)
@MOV
#000A D00100
(021)
@MOV
#0201
D00101
#0400
D00102
(021)
@MOV
(021)
@MOV
(021)
@MOV
(098)
@RECVD01000
0128
02
A202
04
0128
02
A219
04
0128
02
0128
03
(8)
#0405 D00103
#0030
D00104
D02000
D00100
(013)
DIFU
012801
(9)
(10)
0002
01
(11)
A219
04
(070)
XFER
#000A
D02000
D05030
(12)
END
1,2,3...
62
1. When the SEND(090)/RECV(098) Enabled Flag is ON, and the execution
condition CIO 000000 is ON, execution of the instructions for network
transmissions are started. CIO 0128.00 will remain ON from when
SEND(090) is started until execution has been completed.
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
2. Set the control data.
Number of send words: 10
Serial port 1 (peripheral port)
Destination network address $00 (B network)
Destination node address $00 (B node)
Destination unit address $00 (CPU Unit)
Response required, Communications port No. 4
Number of retries: 5
Response monitor time: 2 s ($0000: Default)
3. Transmit Data Stored
Stores 10 words of data starting from CIO 0100 to D00010 and later.
4. Execute SEND(090).
5. When the instruction for network communications has been completed
(A202.04: ON), CIO 0128.01 will turn ON, and the instruction for sending
on the network is completed.
6. Turns ON when an error is generated during execution of network communications.
7. When the Communications Port Enabled Flag is ON and execution condition CIO 0000.01 is ON, execution of the instruction for receiving via the
network (RECV(098)) is started.
8. Set the control data.
Number of receive words: 10
Serial port 2
Source network address $01
Source node address $04
Source unit address $01 (Inner Board)
Response required, Communications port No. 4
Number of retries: 5
Response monitor time: 4.8 s ($0030)
9. Execute RECV(098).
10. When the execution of network communications instructions has been
completed (A202.04: ON), CIO 0128.03 will turn ON, and the instruction
for receiving via the network is completed.
11. Turns ON when an error is generated during execution of network communications.
12. Reception data processing
When there is no reception error, 10 words of data (starting from D02000)
are stored from D05030 onwards.
63
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Programming Example for Host Computer Side (BASIC): Send
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
64
’***************************************
’**** CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit ****
’**** Command to Host Computer (SEND(090)) ****
’**** Sample Send Program ****
’***************************************
’
’============ Initial Settings ============
CLOSE 1
ON ERROR GOTO *EROPE
DIM CHDATA$ (300)
:’ Data array declaration
OPEN ”COM:E73” AS #1
:’ Opens port.
’
’============ Main Process ============
INPUT #1, COMMAND$
:’ Receives data from PLC (line).
T$=LEFT$ (COMMAND$, LEN (COMMAND$) -3)
:’ Checks FCS.
GOSUB *FCS
IF FCS$<>MID$ (COMMAND$, LEN (COMMAND$) -2, 2) THEN ENDCODE$=”1004”:GOTO *RESPONSE
CMNDCODE$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 27, 4)
:’ Checks command code.
IF CMNDCODE$<>”0102” THEN ENDCODE$=”0401” :GOTO *RESPONSE
FOR I=0 TO VAL (”&H”+MID$ (COMMAND$, 39, 4) ) -1 :’ Sets No. of write elements.
CHDATA$ (I) =MID$(COMMAND$, 43+I*4, 4)
PRINT “Data”;”:”;CHDATA$(I)
NEXT I
ENDCODE$=”0000”
:’ Sets end code to “0000”.
’==========================================
*RESPONSE
:’ Creates a response frame.
RSV$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 9, 2)
:’ Returns received RSV, SID
DA$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 19, 6)
:’ without change.
SA$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 13, 6)
:’ Swaps DNA, DA1, DA2
SID$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 25, 2)
:’ with SNA, SA1, and SA2.
T$=”@000F00C0”+RSV$+”02”+DA$+SA$+SID$+CMNDCODE$+ENDCODE$
GOSUB *FCS
RESPONSE$=T$+FCS$+”*”
PRINT #1, RESPONSE$
:’ Transmits data to PLC (line).
GOTO 140
’
’===== FCS Calculation Subroutine =====
*FCS
:’ Adds FCS.
L=LEN (T$)
A=0
FOR J=1 TO L
TJ$=MID$ (T$, J, I)
A+ASC (TJ$)
XOR A
NEXT J
FCS$=HEX$ (A)
IF LEN (FCS$) =1 THEN FCS$=”0”+FCS$
RETURN
’
’========== Error processing ==========
*EROPE
PRINT ”ERL=”:ERL, ”ERR”;ERR
CLOSE 1
END
FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol
Section 3-5
Programming Example for Host Computer Side (BASIC): Reception
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
’***************************************
’**** CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit ****
’**** Command to Host Computer (RECV(098)) ****
’**** Sample Reception Program ****
’***************************************
’
’============ Initial Settings ============
CLOSE 1
ON ERROR GOTO *EROPE
DIM CHDATA$ (300)
:’ Data array declaration
CHDATA$ (0) =”0000”:CHDATA$ (1) =”1111”:CHDATA$ (2) =”2222”
CHDATA$ (3) =”3333”:CHDATA$ (4) =”4444”:CHDATA$ (5) =”5555”
OPEN ”COM:E73” AS #1
:’ Opens port.
’
’============ Main Process ============
RESPDATA$=””
INPUT #1, COMMAND$
:’ Receives data from PLC (line).
T$=LEFT$ (COMMAND$, LEN (COMMAND$) -3)
:’ Checks FCS.
GOSUB *FCS
IF FCS$<>MID$ (COMMAND$, LEN (COMMAND$) -2, 2) THEN ENDCODE$=”1004”:GOTO *RESPONSE
CMNDCODE$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 27, 4)
:’ Checks command code.
IF CMNDCODE$<>”0101” THEN ENDCODE$=”0401” :GOTO *RESPONSE
FOR I=0 TO VAL (”&H”+MID$ (COMMAND$, 39, 4) ) -1 :’ Sets No. of read elements.
RESPDATA$=RESPDATA$+CHDATA$ (I)
NEXT I
PRINT ”Send data”;RESPDATA$
ENDCODE$=”0000”
:’ Sets end code to “0000”.
’==========================================
*RESPONSE
:’ Creates a response frame.
RSV$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 9, 2)
:’ Returns received RSV, SID
DA$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 19, 6)
:’ without change.
SA$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 13, 6)
:’ Swaps DNA, DA1, DA2
SID$=MID$ (COMMAND$, 25, 2)
:’ with SNA, SA1, and SA2.
T$=”@000F00C0”+RSV$+”02”+DA$+SA$+SID$+CMNDCODE$+ENDCODE$+RESPDATA$
GOSUB *FCS
RESPONSE$=T$+FCS$+”*”
PRINT #1, RESPONSE$
:’ Transmits data to PLC (line).
GOTO 160
’
’===== FCS Calculation Subroutine =====
*FCS
:’ Adds FCS.
L=LEN (T$)
A=0
FOR J=1 TO L
TJ$=MID$ (T$, J, I)
A+ASC (TJ$)
XOR A
NEXT J
FCS$=HEX$ (A)
IF LEN (FCS$) =1 THEN FCS$=”0”+FCS$
RETURN
’
’========== Error processing ==========
*EROPE
PRINT ”ERL=”:ERL, ”ERR”;ERR
CLOSE 1
END
65
Serial Gateway Overview
3-6
3-6-1
Section 3-6
Serial Gateway Overview
Overview
FINS messages (commands) that are received are automatically converted
into the corresponding protocol and then sent via serial communications. The
responses are also automatically converted. FINS messages can be converted into the following protocols.
• CompoWay/F
• Modbus-RTU
• Modbus-ASCII
• Host Link FINS (FINS commands enclosed in Host Link header and terminator)
Note Serial Communications Boards/Units can receive FINS commands
via a FINS network (including Host Link FINS) or via the CPU bus.
Applicable Units and Serial Communications Ports
Command after
conversion
CompoWay/F
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-ASCII
Host Link FINS
Applicable Units and serial communications
ports
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later,
serial port C on the Controller Section of an NSJ
Controller, or serial port 1 or 2 on Option Board of
CP-series CPU Unit (See note)
Serial communications port on Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later
Serial communications port on Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later or serial
port 1 or 2 on Option Board of CP-series CPU Unit
(See note)
Serial communications port on Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later
Note Not possible when a CP1E CPU unit is used.
Using the CPU Unit
FINS message (on network or CPU bus)
FINS header
2803 FINS header
RS-232C or peripheral port
RS-232C or
peripheral port
on CPU Unit
CompoWay/F command
Serial gateway is enabled when the serial communications mode of
the RS-232C or peripheral port is set to Serial Gateway Mode.
66
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
FINS message (via network or CPU bus)
FINS header
2803
CompoWay/F command
FINS header
2804
Modbus-RTU command
FINS header
2805
Modbus-ASCII command
CompoWay/F command
Serial
Communications
Board/Unit
Modbus-RTU command
Modbus-ASCII command
User-specified data
FINS header Userspecified
Host Link header
User-specified
FINS command
Terminator
The Serial Gateway is enabled under the following conditions.
• In Serial Gateway mode
• In protocol macro mode with the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch turned OFF
3-6-2
Types of Protocol Conversion
Type of
conversion
(from FINS)
Frame before conversion
Destination
FINS
FINS data
address
command
2803 hex
CompoWay/F
command
Converting to
Modbus-RTU
2804 hex
Modbus-RTU
command
Converting to
Modbus-ASCII
2805 hex
Modbus-ASCII
command
User-specified
User-specified
Converting to
CompoWay/F
Converting to
Host Link FINS
3-6-3
Serial port
number on
Board/Unit
Any address
except Board/
Unit’s serial
port number.
Protocol after Target (communications partconversion
ner)
(using serial
communications)
CompoWay/F
OMRON CompoCompoWay/F
command
nent (e.g., Temcommand with
perature
FINS header
Controller, Digital
removed sent to
Panel Meter, or
serial port.
Smart Sensor)
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-RTU
command with
command
Slave-compatible
FINS header
device (including
OMRON 3G3JV,
removed sent to
3G3MV, and
serial port.
3G3RV Inverters)
Modbus-ASCII Modbus-ASCII
Modbus-ASCII
command
Slave-compatible
command with
device (e.g., temFINS header
perature controlremoved sent to
ler, indicator, or
serial port.
power monitor)
Transfers FINS
FINS comOMRON PC (CS/
command inside mand for Host CJ/CP/NSJ
Host Link header Link communi- Series, or CVM1/
and terminator.
cations
CV Series)
Processing at
Board/Unit
Converting FINS to CompoWay/F
OMRON Components connected serially to a PC via CompoWay/F can be
accessed from the CPU Unit or PT using CompoWay/F commands enclosed
in FINS messages.
• Sent FINS message: FINS header + FINS command code 2803 hex +
CompoWay/F command
• Message after conversion: CompoWay/F command
67
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
CPU Unit
(CMND(490)
instruction) or
PT (Programmable Terminal)
FINS message
FINS header 2803
CompoWay/F command
CompoWay/F command
CompoWay/F command encapsulated
using FINS command 2803 hex
Serial Communications
Unit/Board
CompoWay/F command
CompoWay/Fcompatible
OMRON
Component
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
(Via network or CPU bus)
CompoWay/F Slave-compatible Components
Temperature Controllers
Component
Thermac NEO
Thermac R
Timer/Counters
Digital Panel Meters
Smart Sensors
Cam Positioners
Safety Controllers
Plug-in Temperature Controllers
Digital Controller Boards
Digital Controllers
Timers/Counters
Digital Panel Meters
Digital Load Cell Meters
Digital Rotary/Pulse Meters
Digital Incrementing Panel
Meters
Digital Time Interval Meters
Digital Temperature/Process
Meters
ZX Communications Interface
Units
-----
Model series
E5GN (G components)
E5CN
E5EN
E5AN
E5AR
E5ER
E5ZN
E5ZM
ES100X
H8GN (G components)
K3GN (G components)
K3NX
K3NV
K3NR
K3NP
K3NC
K3NH
ZX-SF11
3F88L-160, 3F88L-162
F3SX
System Configuration Patterns
Sending FINS Messages Using CMND(490) in CPU Unit’s Ladder Program
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to CompoWay/F protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from CPU Unit (on the Same PC)
CPU Bus-to-Serial
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
CMND(490)
FINS message
Protocol
conversion
FINS header 2803
CompoWay/F
command
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
68
Details
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
OMRON components connected serially to Optional
the Serial Communications Board/Unit
using CompoWay/F can be accessed from
a CPU Unit in the same PC.
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Access from CPU Unit (PC on the Network)
FINS message-to-Serial
Details
OMRON components connected serially
to the Serial Communications Board/Unit
using CompoWay/F can be accessed from
a CPU Unit in a PC connected to the network.
CMND(490)
FINS message
FINS header
2803 CompoWay/F
command
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Network (Ethernet, Controller
Link, DeviceNet)
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to CompoWay/F protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or
serial NT Link
Details
Access via serial communications using
CompoWay/F is possible from a PT connected to the network by executing a
Smart Active Part that is connected serially, which automatically sends an internal
FINS command.
NS-series PT
Smart Active Part
FINS message (sent internally)
FINS header 2803
Ethernet
CompoWay/F
command
CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/Board
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
Note When the NS-series PT is connected serially to the PC using
serial communications mode
(1:N NT Links), and the NSseries PT sends FINS commands encapsulated in NT Link
commands using Smart Active
Parts, the CPU Unit removes the
NT Link header, etc. from the
received command, converting it
to a FINS command, and transfers the command to the Serial
Communications Board/Unit.
The Serial Communications
Board/Unit uses the Serial Gateway to convert the command into
the specified protocol. This operation enables serially connected
devices to access the Serial
Communications Board/Unit
from Smart Active Parts using an
NS-series PT.
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information.
• Remote destination network address (DNA)
69
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables.
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Network address for specifying actual remote PC.
• Remote destination node address (DA1)
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
00 hex (local PC’s internal communications) (For serial-to-serial-to-serial conversion, increment the Host Link unit number by 1.)
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Node address for specifying actual remote PC (For serial-to-serial-to-serial conversion, increment the Host Link unit number by 1.)
• Remote destination unit address (DA2)
Unit address of serial port
(2) The contents of the CompoWay/F command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows:
Node number + subaddress + SID + command text (ASCII must be used.)
STX, ETX+BCC are not required when sending FINS. They are added
automatically for serial communications.
3-6-4
Converting FINS to Modbus-RTU
Modbus-RTU Slave-compatible devices (including OMRON Inverters) connected serially to a PC via Modbus-RTU can be accessed from the PC or PT
using Modbus-RTU commands enclosed in FINS messages.
• Sent FINS message: FINS header + FINS command code 2804 hex +
Modbus-RTU command
• Message after conversion: Modbus-RTU command
CPU Unit
(CMND(490)
instruction) or
PT (Programmable Terminal)
Modbus-RTU command
2804 Modbus-RTU command
Modbus-RTU command encapsulated
using FINS command 2804 hex
(Via network or CPU bus)
FINS header
Serial Communications
Unit/Board
Modbus-RTU command
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
Modbus-RTU Slave-compatible OMRON Devices
Type
Inverters
Temperature Controllers
70
Model series
3G3JV
3G3MV
3G3RV
E5CN (New version)
Modbus-RTU
Slavecompatible
device
(OMRON
Inverter, etc.)
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
System Configuration Patterns
Sending FINS Messages Using CMND(490) in CPU Unit’s Ladder Program
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Modbus-RTU protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from CPU Unit (on the Same PC)
CPU Bus-to-Serial
Details
OMRON Inverters connected serially to
the Serial Communications Board/Unit
using Modbus-RTU can be accessed from
a CPU Unit in the same PC.
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CMND(490)
CPU Unit
FINS message
Protocol
conversion
FINS header 2804
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
Modbus-RTU
command
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Modbus-RTU
Slave device
(e.g, OMRON
Inverter)
Access from CPU Unit (on Network PC)
FINS message-to-Serial
CMND(490)
FINS message
FINS header
2804 Modbus-RTU
command
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Network (Ethernet,
Controller Link,
DeviceNet)
Details
OMRON Inverters connected serially to
the Serial Communications Board/Unit
using Modbus-RTU can be accessed from
a CPU Unit in a PC connected to the network.
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Modbus-RTU
Slave device
(e.g, OMRON
Inverter)
71
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Modbus-RTU protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or
serial NT Link
Details
Access via serial communications using
Modbus-RTU is possible from a PT connected to the network by executing a
Smart Active Part that is connected serially, which automatically sends an internal
FINS command.
NS-series PT
Smart Active Parts
FINS message (sent internally)
FINS header 2804
Ethernet
Modbus-RTU
command
Serial Communications Unit/Board
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
ORMON Inverter
Note When the NS-series PT is connected serially to the PC using
serial communications mode
(1:N NT Links), and the NSseries PT sends FINS commands encapsulated in NT Link
commands using Smart Active
Parts, the CPU Unit removes the
NT Link header, etc. from the
received command, converting it
to a FINS command, and transfers the command to the Serial
Communications Board/Unit.
The Serial Communications
Board/Unit uses the Serial Gateway to convert the command into
the specified protocol. This operation enables serially connected
devices to access the Serial
Communications Board/Unit
from Smart Active Parts using an
NS-series PT.
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information.
• Remote destination network address (DNA): Same as for CompoWay/F.
• Remote destination node address (DA1): Same as for CompoWay/F.
• Remote unit address (DA2): Same as for CompoWay/F.
(2) The contents of the Modbus-RTU command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows:
Slave address (binary) + FUNCTION code (binary) + Communications
data (binary)
Start and CRC+End are not required when sending FINS. They are added automatically for serial communications.
72
Serial Gateway Overview
3-6-5
Section 3-6
Converting from FINS to Modbus-ASCII
Modbus-ASCII Slave-compatible devices connected serially to a PLC via
Modbus-ASCII can be accessed from the PLC using Modbus-ASCII commands enclosed in FINS messages.
• Sent FINS message: FINS header + FINS command code 2805 hex +
Modbus-ASCII command
• Message after conversion: Modbus-ASCII command
FINS message
CPU Unit
(CMND(490)
instruction)
FINS header
2805
Modbus-ASCII command ModbusModbus-ASCII command
Modbus-ASCII command encapsulated
using FINS command 2805 hex
Serial Communications
Unit/Board
Modbus-ASCII command
ASCII Slavecompatible
device
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
(Via network or CPU bus)
System Configuration Patterns
Sending FINS Messages Using CMND(490) in CPU Unit’s Ladder Program
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Modbus-ASCII protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from CPU Unit (on the Same PLC)
CPU Bus-to-Serial
Details
Slaves connected serially to the Serial
Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-ASCII can be accessed from a CPU
Unit in the same PLC.
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
CMND(490)
FINS message
Protocol
conversion
FINS header 2805
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
Modbus-ASCII command
Modbus-ASCII command
RS-485 (Modbus-ASCII)
Modbus-ASCII
Slave device
Access from CPU Unit (on Network PLC)
FINS message-to-Serial
Details
Slaves connected serially to the Serial
Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-ASCII can be accessed from a CPU
Unit in a PLC on the network.
CMND(490)
FINS message
Modbus-ASCII
FINS header 2805 command
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
Network (Ethernet, Controller
Link, DeviceNet)
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-ASCII
command
RS-485 (Modbus-ASCII)
Modbus-ASCII
Slave device
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information.
• Remote destination network address (DNA): Same as for CompoWay/F.
• Remote destination node address (DA1): Same as for CompoWay/F.
• Remote unit address (DA2): Same as for CompoWay/F.
(2) The contents of the Modbus-ASCII command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows:
Slave address (ASCII) + FUNCTION code (ASCII) + Communications
data (ASCII)
73
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
The header “:” (3A hex) and LRC+CR/LF are not required when sending
FINS. They are added automatically for serial communications.
3-6-6
Converting from FINS to Host Link FINS
A PC slave that is connected serially to the PC master via Host Link can be
accessed from the PC master or personal computer (see note) using FINS
messages. Accessing a device on another network via Host Link (serial communications) is also possible by using FINS messages. By converting the
FINS to Host Link FINS, the PC can function as a Host Link master.
Note Applications such as CX-Programmer or CX-Protocol that use CXServer as a communications driver.
• Sent FINS message: FINS header + User-specified FINS command (see
note 1)
• Message after conversion: FINS command enclosed in Host Link header
and terminator (see note 2)
Host Link FINS command
FINS message
CX-Programmer or other
application
using CXServer or
CPU Unit
(CMND(490))
User-specified
FINS command
(Via serial, network,
or CPU bus)
Serial Communications
Unit/Board
Host Link header
User-specified FINS
command
Terminator
FINS command encapsulated using Host Link
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
OMRON PC (CS/CJ
Series, CVM1/CV
Series)
(To other network)
FINS command
System Configuration Patterns
Access from CX-Programmer (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Host Link FINS for sending in
this operation.
Access from Serially Connected CX-Programmer
Serial-to-Serial
Details
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CX-Programmer, etc.
CPU Unit
Peripheral or RS-232C port
Protocol
conversion
Host Link header
User-specified
FINS command
User-specified
Host Link header
FINS command
Terminator
Terminator
RS-422A/485 (Host Link)
Used as Host Link Master
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Personal computers (e.g., CX- Optional
Programmer) connected serially (via tool bus or Host Link)
to the PC master can access a
PC slave that is connected
serially to the PC master via
Host Link.
CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PC (Host Link Slave)
Use the following method to access the serially (serial-to-serial) connected
PC from the CX-Programmer.
74
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
System Configuration Example
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later
Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit Ver. 1.2 or later
(Select SCU (Unit 0 to 15) in the UNIT field.)
Set the relay PC.
(Select in the Change PLC Dialog Box.)
Serial Gateway function
port (Select port 1/2 in the
PC name: PC2
PORT field according to
the calculated address.)
Network type: Select [PC2].
Serial
Gateway
Host Link FINS
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option
in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings.
PC name: PC1
Target PC Host Link unit number
Enter the Host Link unit number in the
Host Link Unit Number field for the target
PC in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings.
1,2,3...
1. Register the PC to be connected serially (using Host Link FINS) in the
project gateway (e.g., PC2).
2. In the Change PLC Dialog Box of the target PC (e.g., PC1), select the relay
PC (gateway PC) in the Network Type pull-down menu (e.g., [PC2] (See
note.)) and click the Settings Button to the right of the Network Type pulldown menu.
Note The PC name enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [PC2]) indicates the
gateway PC.
Select the PC to be used as the
relay PC (e.g., [PC2]) in the
Network Type pull-down menu.
3. The Network Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Guide for Serial Gateway Button.
4. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the unit and the port number under the Calculate Address Area, the
serial port number address is automatically calculated in the Calculated
Address Field.
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option, and enter the actual Host
Link unit number for the target (communications partner) PC in the Host
Link Unit Number field (see note).
Finally, click the Apply Button.
75
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
The Serial
Communications port
address is automatically
calculated.
Select the Unit.
Select the port.
Select this option.
Enter the unit number for the
actual Host Link (values are
incremented by 1 automatically).
Note
When using the CX-Programmer, enter the actual Host Link unit number. Do
not add 1 to the value. The CX-Programmer will automatically add 1 internally.
Access from CX-Programmer Connected to Network
Network-to-Serial
Details
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Personal computers (e.g., CX-Pro- Required
grammer) connected through the
network to the PC master can
access a PC slave that is connected serially to the PC master
via Host Link.
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS message
Network (Ethernet, Controller
LInk, DeviceNet)
User-specified
FINS command
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
User-specified
Host Link header FINS command
Terminator
RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
Used as Host
Link Master
CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PC (Host Link Slave)
Note This configuration can be connected to other networks, as shown below.
Network-to-Serial-to-Network
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS message
User-specified
FINS command
Network (Ethernet,
Controller LInk, DeviceNet)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
Host Link header
User-specified
FINS command
RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
CS/CJ-series
or CVM1/CVseries PC
(Host Link
Slave)
Used as Host
Link Master
User-specified
FINS command
76
Terminator
Network (Ethernet,
Controller LInk,
DeviceNet)
Details
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Personal computers (e.g., CX-Pro- Required
grammer) connected through the
network to the PC master can
access a PC on another network
via a PC slave that is connected
serially to the PC master via Host
Link.
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Sending FINS Messages or Sending/Receiving Data Using CMND(490), RECV(098),
SEND(090) in the CPU Unit’s Ladder Program
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Host Link FINS in this operation.
Access from CPU Unit (on the Same PC)
CPU bus-to-Serial
Details
Slave PCs connected serially to
the Serial Communications Board/
Unit using Host Link can be
accessed from the CPU Unit in the
same PC.
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CMND(490)
or
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CPU Unit
FINS
message
Protocol
conversion
User-specified FINS
command
Host Link header
User-specified
FINS command
Terminator
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Optional
RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
Used as Host
Link Master
CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PC (Host Link Slave)
Access from CPU Unit (on Network PC)
Network-to-Serial
Details
Slave PCs connected serially to
the Serial Communications Board/
Unit using Host Link can be
accessed from a CPU Unit in a PC
connected to the network.
CMND(490)
or
SEND(090)/RECV(098)
FINS message
User-specified
FINS command
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Required
Network (Ethernet,
Controller LInk, DeviceNet)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
User-specified
Host Link header FINS command
Terminator
RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
Used as Host
Link Master
CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PC (Host Link Slave)
Note This configuration can be connected to other networks, as shown below
Network-to-Serial-to-Network
CMND(490)
or
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
FINS message
User-specified
FINS command
Network (Ethernet, Controller
LInk, DeviceNet)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Details
CPU Units in PCs connected to
the network can access a PC on
another network via a PC slave
that is connected serially to the
Serial Communications Board/Unit
via Host Link.
Routing tables to treat serial
communications path as network
Required
Protocol
conversion
Host Link header
User-specified
FINS command
Terminator
RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
CS/CJ-series or
CVM1/CV-series PC
(Host Link Slave)
Used as Host
Link Master
User-specified
FINS command
Network (Ethernet,
Controller LInk, DeviceNet)
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information.
77
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
• Remote destination network address (DNA)
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables.
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Unit address of serial port.
• Remote destination node address (DA1)
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
Unit number for Host Link incremented by 1 (1 to 32)
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Unit number for Host Link incremented by 1 (1 to 32)
• Remote destination unit address (DA2)
Any unit address except that for the serial port (The destination for the
FINS message must not be the serial port of the Board/Unit.)
• FINS command code: Any
(2) When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490)
instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one
(1 to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address
(word C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the
unit number of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link
unit number without incrementing by one will access the PC with the entered Host Link unit number less one.
For example, specify the remote PC with Host Link unit number 2 by entering 3 for the remote destination node address. If 2 is entered, the PC
with Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed.
To access a PC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway
from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number,
without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link
SYSWAY Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box.
(3) The contents of the FINS command enclosed by the Host Link header
and terminator is as follows:
@+Host Link unit number + Host Link header FA + FINS header + FINS
command + Text + FCS + * + CR
3-6-7
Treating Serial Communications Paths as Networks
When the Serial Gateway is executed, routing tables are either required or
optional as follows:
• Routing tables are required to treat a serial communications path as a
network when converting FINS messages to Host Link FINS for serial
conversion via the network.
• Under other conditions, routing tables are optional.
The details are provided in the following tables.
78
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables According to Target
Target
Protocol
conversion
PLC (CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series, CVM1/
CV Series)
Any component
except PLC
Host Link
FINS
Case
Example
Routing FINS network including
serial communications path (for
Serial Gateway)
Serial communications path connection only
Network-toserial conversion
Serial-toserial conversion
Network-toserial conversion
Serial-toserial conversion
OMRON Compo- CompoWay/ Routing FINS network including
nent
F
serial communications path (for
Serial Gateway)
Modbus-RTU
ModbusSerial communications path conSlave (including
RTU
nection only
OMRON Inverter)
Modbus-ASCII
ModbusSlave
ASCII
Routing tables
for treating
serial
communications
path as network
Required
Optional
Optional
Optional
Specifying Address in FINS Command Source
Target
Protocol
conversion
PLC (CS/CJ /CP/NSJ
Series, CVM1/CV Series)
Any component except
PLC
OMRON
Component
ModbusRTU Slave
(including
OMRON
Inverter)
Routing
tables for
Remote network
treating
address
serial communications path
as network
Host Link
Created
Network address
FINS
assigned to the
serial port according to the routing
tables
Not created Serial port unit
address
CompoWay/ Created
Network address
F
assigned to the
serial port according to the routing
tables
ModbusNot created Network address for
RTU
specifying the
actual remote PC
FINS header
Remote node
address
Remote unit
address
Host Link unit number incremented by
1 (1 to 32)
(See note.)
Must be the actual
unit address of the
destination unit.
00 hex (indicates
communications in
local PC)
Must be the unit
address of the serial
port.
Node address for
specifying the
actual remote PC
ModbusModbusASCII Slave ASCII
Note
3-6-8
To access from a CX-Programmer, Select Change PLC - Serial Gateway
Guide, and enter the actual Host Link unit number, The CX-Programmer will
automatically increment the value by one.
Using a PLC as the Target
Network-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables are required to enable the serial communications path to be
treated as a network.
79
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Required Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
FINS
command
sent
Remote network address
(1) Serial communications path
network address
Example
A
Remote node address
(2) Unit No. for Host Link
incremented by 1.
s+1
Remote unit address
(3) Actual remote unit address for
FINS command
CPU Unit: 00 hex
FINS network
CPU Unit
FINS Communications Unit
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
PLC
Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network
Network
Unit number
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
A
Calculated from unit number: 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
(1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
Target: PLC
(2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
(3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
Without Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
FINS
command
sent
Address
Remote network
address
Contents
Example
(1) Serial communications path unit address
80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from Unit No. 0,
port 1
Remote node address
(2) Unit No. for Host Link
incremented by 1.
(3) Actual remote unit address for FINS command
s+1
Remote unit address
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
CPU Unit: 00 hex
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
PLC
No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
80
(1) Network address:
To serial communications path unit address (e.g., 80 hex)
Target: PLC
(2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
(3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
With Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
FINS
command
sent
Remote network address
Remote node address
Remote unit address
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
(1) Serial communications path
unit address
(2) Unit No. for Host Link
incremented by 1.
(3) Actual remote unit address
for FINS command
Example
A
s+1
CPU Unit: 00 hex
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network
Network
Unit number
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
A
Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
3-6-9
(1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
Target: PLC
(2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
(3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
Using a non-PLC Component as the Target
Network-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
Without Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
FINS
command
sent
Remote network address
Remote node address
Remote unit address
Address to
distinguish
standard PLC
(1) Network
address
(2) Node
address
Example
N
m
Serial port unit address 80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from unit
number 0, port 1
(3) Unit address:
To serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
PLC
CPU Unit
Address to distinguish standard PLC
(1) Network address: To N
(2) Node address: To m
FINS Communications Unit
FINS network: Network address N
No routing tables required to treat serial
communications path as a network
Serial communications path
(CompoWay/F, Modbus)
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
81
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
With Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
FINS
command
sent
Remote network address
(1) Serial communications
path network address
Remote node address
(2) Local PC internal communications
Remote unit address
(3) Serial port unit address
Example
A
00 hex
80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from Unit No. 0,
port 1
FINS network
(2) Node address:
Local PLC internal
communications
To 00 hex
CPU Unit
FINS Communications Unit
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
(3) Unit address:
To serial port unit
address
(e.g., 80 hex)
PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network
Network
Unit number
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
A
Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
Serial communications path
(CompoWay/F, Modbus)
(1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
Without Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
Example
serial conAddress for Direct
00 hex (See note.)
nection (See
note.)
standard
direct serial Local PC inter- 00 hex
Remote node address connection nal communications
80 hex (128 decimal)
Serial port unit
Calculated from unit
Remote unit address
address
number 0, port 1
FINS
command
sent
Remote network address
Address for standard
direct serial connection:
(1) Network address:
Direct serial connection
To 00 hex
(2) Node address: Local
PC internal
communications
To 00 hex
(3) Unit address:
To serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
Note: Serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
can be set
PLC
No routing tables required to treat serial
communications path as a network
Serial communications path
(CompoWay/F, Modbus)
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
With Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Contents
FINS
command
sent
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
(2) Unit address:
To serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
Example
Remote network address (1) Serial communications A
path network address
Remote node address
(2) Local PC internal communications 00 hex
Remote unit address
(3) Serial port unit address 80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from unit
number 0, port 1
PLC
Routing tables for treating serial
communications path as a network
Network
Unit number
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
A
Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
Serial communications path
(CompoWay/F, Modbus)
(1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
82
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
Serial-to-Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
Without Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
Example
89 hex (137 decimal)
Calculated from PC_1 unit
number 2, port 2
PC_2 unit number for
s+1
Host Link + 1
80 hex (128 decimal)
Remote unit PC_2 serial port
Calculated from unit number
address
unit address
0, port 1
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 2, port 1
Remote node
address
CPU Unit
FINS
command
sent
Address Specification
Address
Contents
PC_1 serial port
Remote netunit address
work address
(1) Network address:
To PLC_1 serial port
unit address (e.g., 89
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
PLC_1
No routing tables required to treat serial
communications path as a network
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
CPU Unit
(2) Node address: PLC_2
unit numbers for Host Link
(0 to 31) + 1
PLC_2
No routing tables required to treat serial
communications path as a network
Serial communications path
(CompoWay/F, Modbus)
(3) Unit address: To
PLC_2 serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
With Routing Tables
Specify the addresses as shown in the following example.
Address Specification
Address
Remote network
address
Remote node
address
Remote unit
address
Contents
A
s+1
PC_2 serial port unit address
80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from unit number
0, port 1
PLC_1
No routing tables required to treat serial
communications path as a network
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
(3) Unit address:
To PLC_2 serial port unit
address (e.g., 80 hex)
CPU Unit
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
(2) Node address:
PLC_2 unit numbers for
Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
Example
PC_2 serial communications
path network address A
PC_2 unit number for Host
Link + 1
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 2, port 1
CPU Unit
FINS
command
sent
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS)
PLC_2
Routing tables for treating serial
communications path as a network
Network
Unit number
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
A
Calculated from unit number 0, port 1
(1) Network address: To PLC_1 serial
communications path network address A
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
Serial communications path (CompoWay/F, Modbus)
83
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
3-6-10 Explanation
To treat the serial communications path as a network, the serial port itself is
recognized as a Communications Unit and is allocated a network address.
CPU Unit
Peripheral port
Communications
Unit
Unit address:
253 (decimal)
RS-232C port
Unit address:
252 (decimal)
Expressed
as:
Local network table in routing tables
Unit number Network
(See note.)
address
252
n
Set correspondence
Note: The unit number is set as a
CPU Bus Unit for Communications Units, but the unit address
is set for the serial port.
• Peripheral port: 253 (decimal)
• RS-232C port: 252 (decimal)
Network
Serial communications path
Assigned to network address n
Serial Communications Unit/Board
Serial port
Communications
Unit
Unit address U
(See note.)
Expressed
as:
Local network table in routing tables
Unit number Network
address
(See note.)
U
n
Set correspondence
Serial communications path
Network
Assigned to network address n
Note: The unit number is set as a
CPU Bus Unit for Communications Units, but the unit address
(80 hex/81 hex + unit number ×
4 hex, as a decimal) is set for
the serial port.
The CX-Net in the CX-Programmer is used to set the relationship between the
serial port’s unit address and the allocated network address in the local network tables of the routing tables. These settings are then transferred to the
CPU Unit to which the Serial Communications Unit/Board is mounted.
CX-Net in CXProgrammer
Serial Communications Unit/Board
PC
Local network table in routing tables
Network
Unit number
address
n
U
Set the unit address
U as a decimal for
the unit number.
Local
network
table
Serial communications path
Unit address U (80 hex/81 hex
+ unit number × 4 hex)
Network address n
Unit Addresses for Serial
Communications Ports
CS/CJ Series CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Serial communications port on
Unit address
CPU Unit
Peripheral port
FD hex (253 decimal)
RS-232C port
FC hex (252 decimal)
84
Serial Gateway Overview
Section 3-6
CP-series CPU Unit
CP-series CPU Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Serial communications port on
Unit address
Option Board of CPU Unit
Serial port 1
FD hex (253 decimal)
Serial port 2
FC hex (252 decimal)
NSJ Controller
NSJ Controller
Serial port C on
Controller Section
Serial communication port on
NSJ Controller
Serial port C
Unit address
FC hex (252 decimal)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
• Serial Port 1 Unit Addresses
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
80
84
88
8C
90
94
98
9C
A0
A4
A8
AC
B0
B4
B8
BC
Decimal
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 228
Board
E4
• Serial Port 2 Unit Addresses
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
81
85
89
8D
91
95
99
9D
A1
A5
A9
AD
B1
B5
B9
BD
Decimal
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189 229
Board
E5
These settings enable the serial communications path to be treated as a single FINS network. Further, the network address allocated to the serial port
can be specified in the destination network address part of the FINS message. This enables messages to passed on to serial ports in a system comprised of multiple networks connected to a single PC (including the serial
communications path).
FINS message
Serial Communications Unit/Board
CPU Unit
Routing
enabled
Local
network
table
Serial communications path
Specify on which path
to send the message.
85
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Reasons for Routing Tables
CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII Protocol Conversion
Routing tables are not required to enable serial communications paths to be
treated as networks. (The serial port can be specified in the node without
using routing tables by specifying the node to which the Board/Unit is connected, and specifying the unit address as that of the serial port.)
Host Link FINS Protocol Conversion and Use of Network
Routing tables are required to enable the serial communications path to be
treated as a network. This is because with Host Link FINS, the FINS remote
node address is used to specify the target (communications partner PC that is
the Host Link slave). Therefore, the node to which the Board/Unit is mounted
cannot always be specified, depending on the FINS remote node address. To
specify the Unit at the target requires the FINS remote unit address. Therefore, the serial port cannot always be specified depending on the FINS unit
address.
The network address for the serial communications path is used to specify
from the network the node to which the Board/Unit is mounted and the serial
port. Therefore, routing tables must be used to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a network.
Host Link FINS Protocol Conversion and Use of Serial Connection
Routing tables are not required to enable serial communications paths to be
treated as networks. The serial port in the node can be specified without routing tables by specifying the network address as the unit address of the serial
port.
3-7
3-7-1
Communications Frames
CompoWay/F
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Serial port
allocated
address
or local
network
address
FINS command
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Remote
unit
address
(DA2)
00 hex
Serial
port unit
address
Etc.
MRC
28
or local
network
node
address
CompoWay/F
(See note.)
SRC
03
Node No.
(× 101)
(× 102)
(ASCII code
2 bytes)
Subaddress
"00"
(ASCII code
3030 hex)
etc.
SID
"0"
(ASCII
code
30 hex)
Command
(MRC, SRC)
(ASCII code
4 bytes)
Frame after Conversion
CompoWay/F
STX
(02 hex)
86
Node No.
(× 101)
(× 102)
(ASCII code
2 bytes)
Subaddress
"00"
(ASCII code
3030 hex)
etc.
SID
"0"
(ASCII
code
30 hex)
Command
(MRC, SRC)
(ASCII code
4 bytes)
Text
(ASCII code)
ETX
(03 hex)
BCC
Text
(ASCII code)
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Note
CompoWay/F commands use ASCII as the transmission code. Therefore, be
sure to use ASCII for the CompoWay/F command after the FINS command
code 2803 hex (from node number to text) using CMND(490) or other instruction.
Example: If the CompoWay/F command MRC SRC is “01” “02” (where the
quotation marks (“ ”) indicate ASCII characters), 0, 1, 0, 2 must be treated as
ASCII characters. Therefore, set “01” as 3031 hex (not 01 hex), and “02” as
3032 hex (not 02 hex).
Further, to write the CompoWay/F command to the command storage area
using CMND(490) in frame order (without creating empty bytes), the SID component of the CompoWay/F command requires 1 byte of ASCII as 30 hex, so
the subsequent components (s+3 and afterwards) must be set in one byte
each.
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
CompoWay/F
Subaddress
"00"
(ASCII
code
3030
hex) etc.
STX
Node1No.
(02 hex) (× 102)
(× 10 )
(ASCII
code
4 bytes)
End code
(ASCII
code
8 bytes)
Command Response Text
(MRC,
(MRES,
(ASCII
SRC)
SRES)
code)
(ASCII
(ASCII
code
code
8 bytes) 8 bytes)
ETX
BCC
(03 hex)
Frame after Conversion
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Serial
00 hex
port
allocated
address
3-7-2
FINS command
Remote
unit address
(DA2)
etc.
MRC
Serial
28
port unit
address
SRC
03
FINS end code
MRES SRES
Userspecified
Userspecified
CompoWay/F
(See note.)
Node No.
(× 101)
(× 102)
(ASCII code
2 bytes)
SubEnd code Command
address
(MRC,
(ASCII
"00"
SRC)
code
(ASCII code
(ASCII
3030 hex) 2 bytes) code
etc.
4 bytes)
Response Text
(MRES,
(ASCII
SRES)
code)
(ASCII
code
4 bytes)
Modbus-RTU
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
FINS command
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Serial port 00 hex
allocated
address
or local
network
address
or local
network
node
address
Remote Etc.
unit
address
(DA2)
MRC
SRC
Serial
port
unit
address
28
04
Modbus-RTU
(command section only)
Slave
address
(1 byte)
FUNCTION
code(1 byte)
Communications data
(n bytes)
Frame after Conversion
Modbus-RTU frame
Start (silent
interval of
3.5
characters)
(See note.)
Note
Slave
address
(1 byte)
FUNCTION
code
(1 byte)
Communications data
(n bytes)
Error
check
CRC
(1 byte)
End (silent
interval of
3.5
characters)
(See note.)
The silent interval in the Modbus-RTU frame is automatically generated by the
Serial Communications Board/Unit.
87
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Modbus-RTU frame
Start (silent
interval of
3.5
characters)
(See note.)
Slave
address
(1 byte)
FUNCTION
code
(1 byte)
Communications data
(n bytes)
Error
check
CRC
(1 byte)
End (silent
interval of
3.5
characters)
(See note.)
Frame after Conversion
FINS header
3-7-3
FINS command FINS end code
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Serial port
allocated
address
or local
network
address
00 hex Serial
port
unit
or local address
network
node
address
Remote
unit
address
(DA2)
Etc.
MRC
SRC
28
04
MRES SRES
Userspecified
Userspecified
Modbus-RTU
(command section only)
Slave
address
(1 byte)
FUNCTION
code (1 byte)
Modbus-ASCII
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Remote
unit
address
(DA2)
Serial port
allocated
address
00 hex
or local
network
address
or local
network
node
address
Serial
port
unit
address
FINS command
Etc.
MRC
SRC
28
05
Modbus-ASCII
(command section only)
Slave
address
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
FUNCTION
code
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
Communications data
(ASCII code n characters)
Frame after Conversion
Modbus-ASCII frame
Header
":"
(ASCII code
3A hex)
88
Slave address
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
FUNCTION code
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
Communications data
(ASCII code n characters)
CR
(0D hex)
LF
(0A hex)
Communications data
(n bytes)
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Modbus-ASCII frame
Header
":"
(ASCII code
3A hex)
Slave address
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
FUNCTION code
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
Communications data
(ASCII code n characters)
or error code
CR
(0D hex)
LF
(0A hex)
Frame after Conversion
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Serial port
allocated
address
or local
network
address
3-7-4
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
FINS command
Remote Etc.
unit
address
(DA2)
00 hex Serial
port
unit
or local address
FINS end code
MRC
SRC
MRES
SRES
28
05
Userspecified
Userspecified
network
node
address
Modbus-ASCII
(command section only)
Slave
address
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
FUNCTION
code
(ASCII code
2 characters:
4 bytes)
Communications data
(ASCII code n characters)
or error code
Host Link FINS
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
FINS
command
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Serial port
allocated
address
or serial
port unit
address
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Unit No.
for Host
Link
+1
(1 to 32)
Remote
unit
address
(DA2)
Any
except
serial
port
unit
address
Etc. MRC
FINS text
SRC
User- Userspeci- specified
fied
User-specified
Frame after Conversion
Host Link
header
@
Unit No. for
Host Link
(0 to 31)
Host
Link
header
code
FA
Etc.
Text
FINS header
FINS
command
FINS text
Error
check
code
Terminator
FCS
*+CR
89
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Host Link
header
@
Unit No. for
Host Link
(0 to 31)
Host
Link
header
code
FA
Text
Etc.
FINS header
FINS
command
Error
check
code
End code
FINS text
Terminator
FCS
*+CR
Frame after Conversion
FINS header
Remote
network
address
(DNA)
Serial port
allocated
address
or serial
port unit
address
3-7-5
Remote
node
address
(DA1)
Unit No.
for Host
Link
+1
(1 to 32)
Remote Etc.
unit
address
(DA2)
FINS
command
MRC SRC
End code
User- Userspeci- specified
fied
Any
except
serial
port
unit
address
FINS text
User-specified
Sending Commands Using the CMND(490) Instruction
Use the following method to send FINS commands to the Serial Communications Board/Unit from the PC.
Setting CMND(490) Operands
S Operand
• Set the FINS command code (2803/2804/2805 hex) in S.
• Set the data without spaces (see note) following the FINS command code
in S+1 onwards.
Note
Frames are set in the same order as in I/O memory from leftmost to rightmost
byte (without blank bytes (00 hex)).
C Operand
C+2 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination network address)
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables.
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
• CompoWay/F, Modbus: Depends on the system configuration.
• Host Link FINS: Always set the unit address of the serial port.
C+3 bits 08 to 15 (Remote destination node address)
• CompoWay/F, Modbus
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
00 hex (indicates local PC communications)
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Node address for specifying the actual remote PC
• Host Link FINS
• Host Link unit number incremented by one (1 to 32)
C+3 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination unit address)
• CompoWay/F, Modbus
Always set the unit address of the serial port
90
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Note Use either of the following methods to specify the serial port using
the CMND(490) instruction.
• Set 80/81 hex + 4 × unit number directly as the serial port unit address
in the send destination unit address bits 00 to 07 of C+3. (With this
method, set the serial port number (physical port) to 0 hex (not used)
in bits 08 to 11 of C+2)
• Set the unit address of the Serial Communications Board/Unit itself
(Board: E1 hex; Unit: 10 hex + unit number) in the send destination unit
address bits 00 to 07 of C+3, and set the serial port numbers (Port
number 1: 1 hex; Port number 2: 2 hex) in the serial port number (physical port) bits 08 to 11 of C+2.
• Host Link FINS
Always set the unit address of the actual destination unit.
Sending Modbus-RTU Commands
• Set the FINS command code 2804 hex indicating the Modbus-RTU conversion in S.
• Set the slave address (1 byte) + FUNCTION code (1 byte) + communications data (n bytes) in order of leftmost byte to rightmost bytes (see note)
from S+1 onwards.
Note
For Modbus-RTU, set the Modbus-RTU slave address (1 byte) in the leftmost
byte of S+1, and the FUNCTION code (1 byte) in the rightmost byte of S+.
Example of Sending Modbus-RTU Command Using CMND(490) Instruction
This example is for writing a frequency reference value from an OMRON
3G3MV Inverter connected through RS-485 to the Serial Communications
Unit via two networks, Ethernet-to-Controller Link.
Example: The CMND(490) instruction is executed in the PC for Ethernet. The
Modbus-RTU command for writing frequency reference value data is sent via
Ethernet to the 3G3MV Inverter (Modbus-RTU slave address: 02) that is connected to port 1 (Unit address: 80 hex + 4 hex × unit number 3 = 8C hex) of
the Serial Communications Unit (Unit number: 3), that is mounted to the PC
on the Controller Link (Network address: 2; Node address: 5). The frequency
reference value 10.0 Hz (set as 100 decimal in units of 0.1 Hz) is written.
The Modbus-RTU command is configured from the following elements.
Modbus-RTU slave address: 02
FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE)
Write start register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference)
Write data: 0064 hex (100 decimal)
91
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
CMND
instruction
FINS message
FINS header
Network (Ethernet)
2804 Modbus-RTU command
FINS message
FINS header
Conversion Link Unit
Node address: 5
2804 Modbus-RTU command
Serial Communications Unit
Unit No. 3, port 1
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
Network (Controller Link)
Network address: 2
Example: Write data for frequency reference value
(FUNCTION code 10 hex, register No. 0002 hex)
Modbus-RTU command
Port 1 unit address:
80 hex + 4 hex × unit number 3 = 8C hex
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
3G3MV OMRON Inverter
List of Settings
• FINS Network Settings
Item
Value
(Example)
2
Send destination network
address
(Controller Link network
address of PC to which
Serial Communications Unit
is mounted)
5
Send destination node
address
(node address in Controller
Link for PC to which Serial
Communications Unit is
mounted)
Serial Communications Unit 3
unit number
92
Set 02 hex in the control data
C+2 bits 00 to 07 (network
address) of CMND(490).
Note: Set 0 hex in the control
data C+2 bits 08 to 11 (serial
port number) of CMND(490).
Set 05 hex in the control data
C+3 bits 08 to 15 (send destination node address) of
CMND(490).
Use to calculate the following
unit address for the serial port
80 hex + 4 hex × unit number 3
= 8C hex
Set 8C hex in the control data
80 hex + 4 hex ×
unit number 3 = 8C C+3 bits 00 to 07 (send destination unit address) of CMND(490).
hex (or 10 + unit
number 3 - 13 hex, (Alternatively, set 13 hex in the
and serial port num- control data C+3 bits 00 to 07
(send destination unit address)
ber 1 = 1 hex)
and set 1 hex in C+2 bits 08 to 11
(serial port number).)
Serial Communications Unit Port 1
serial port
Send destination unit
address
(unit address of serial port
on Serial Communications
Unit)
Setting location
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
• Modbus-RTU Settings
Command Frame
Item
FINS command code: Converting to
Modbus-RTU = 2804 hex
Set value
2804 hex
Modbus slave address (e.g., 02 hex)
02 hex
FUNCTION code: DATA WRITE = 10
10 hex
hex
Write data register No. (e.g., frequency 0002 hex
reference = 0002 hex)
Number of write data registers (e.g, 1
0001 hex
register)
0200 hex
Number of attached data registers
Note: Set 02 hex of this value in the
leftmost byte of S+4. Set 00 hex as the
leftmost register No. in the rightmost
byte of S+4.
Register No. 0002 hex data (e.g., 0064 6400 hex
hex)
Note: Set 64 hex as the rightmost register No. in the leftmost byte of S+5.
Setting location
Set 2804 hex in controller data
s of the CMND(490) instruction.
Set 0210 hex in controller data
s+1 of the CMND(490) instruction.
Set 0002 hex in controller data
s+2 of CMND(490).
Set 0001 hex in controller data
s+3 of CMND(490).
Set 0200 hex in controller data
s+4 of CMND(490).
Set 6400 hex in controller data
s+5 of CMND(490).
Response Frame
Item
Modbus Slave address (e.g., 02 hex)
FUNCTION code: Write data (= 10 hex)
Write data register No. (e.g., frequency
reference = 0002 hex)
Write data registers (e.g., 1 register)
[CMND
S
D
Setting
02 hex
10 hex
0002 hex
Setting location
Stored in D+2 of CMND(490)
0001 hex
Stored in D+4 of CMND(490)
Stored in D+3 of CMND(490)
C]
Command Details
Operand
Offset
S:
D01000
+0:
+1:
+2:
+3:
+4:
+5:
2804 hex
0210 hex
0002 hex
0001 hex
0200 hex
6400 hex
Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex)
Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE)
Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference)
Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register)
Number of attached data bytes: 02 hex (2 bytes); Leftmost register No.: 00 hex
Rightmost register No.: 64 hex (Frequency reference value: 10.0 Hz when unit is 0.1
Hz), blank = 00 hex
First response storage word
+0:
+1:
+2:
00 0C hex
00 0A hex
0002 hex
+3:
+4:
+5:
058C hex
0000 hex
0000 hex
Number of command data bytes: 000C hex (12 bytes decimal)
Number of response data bytes: 000A hex (10 bytes decimal)
Send destination network address: 02 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (direct serial port
unit address specification)
Send destination node address: 05 hex; Send destination unit address: 8C hex
Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex
Response monitoring time: 2 s
D:
D02000
C:
D00000
Value
Meaning
93
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Response
Operand Offset
D:
+0:
D02000
+1:
+2:
+3:
+4:
Value
2804 hex
0000 hex
0210 hex
0002 hex
0001 hex
Meaning
Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex)
FINS end code: 0000 hex (normal)
Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE)
Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference)
Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register)
Sending Host Link FINS Commands
• Set any FINS command code in S.
• Be sure to set the Host Link unit number (0 to 31) incremented by one (1
to 32) for the PC slave corresponding to the send destination node
address in C+3 bits 08 to 15.
Example of Sending Host Link FINS Commands Using CMND(490)
The following example is for sending FINS commands to a CS/CJ/CP-series
PLC or an NSJ Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit
through an RS-422A/485 communications path via an Ethernet network.
Example: The CMND(490) instruction is executed in the PC on the Ethernet.
The FINS command (e.g., OPERATING MODE CHANGE STOP: 0402 hex) is
sent to the CS/CJ/CP-series PLC or NSJ Controller (Host Link unit number =
1) that is connected to port 2 (unit address = 81 hex + 4 hex × unit number 6
= 99 hex = 153 decimal, corresponding to network address 5 in the routing
tables) of the Serial Communications Unit (unit number 6) that is connected to
the PC on the Ethernet. Routing is performed between the networks, so use
the setting for routing tables.
CMND
instruction
Network (Ethernet)
FINS command
Ethernet unit
node address: 4
Serial Communications Unit
Unit No. 6, port 2
CPU Unit
Unit No.
Protocol
conversion
Host Link
header
Port 2 unit address:
81 hex + 4 hex × unit
No. 6 = 99 hex
(153 decimal), which
corresponds to network
address 5.
94
Serial port unit
address: 153
Local
network
table
Unit No. for Host Link = 0
FINS
command
FINS message
E.g., Operation mode change
(operation stopped): 0402 hex
Terminator
Network address
Serial port network
address: 5
RS-422A/485 (Host Link)
Unit No. for Host Link = 1
CS/CJ-series or
CVM1/CV-series PC
(Host Link slave)
Unit No. for Host Link = 2
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Settings
• FINS Network Settings
Item
Send destination network
address
(network address allocated
to target serial port in routing
tables)
Value (example)
Setting location
Network address for • Set 05 hex in bits 00 to 07 (network address) of control data
serial communicaC+2 in the CMND(490) instructions path allocated
tion.
in local network
table settings is 5
Note Set 0 hex in bits 08 to 11
(serial port number) of
control data C+2 in the
CMND(490) instruction
Send destination node
Remote PC unit
• Set 02 hex in bits 08 to 15
number for Host
(send destination node
address
(unit number for Host Link of Link: 1
address) of control data C+3 in
Therefore, set 1+1
the CMND(490) instruction.
PC connected to target
serial port + 1)
=2
CPU Unit: 00 hex
• Set 00 hex in bits 00 to 07 of
Send destination unit
control data C+3 in the
address
CMND(490) instruction.
(unit address of remote unit
on PC connected to target
serial port)
Serial Communications Unit 6
Use the following equation to
unit number
calculate the unit address of the
serial port.
81 hex + 4 hex × unit number 6
= 99 hex (153 decimal)
Use CX-Net to set the local network tables in the routing tables.
Serial Communications Unit
serial port
Port 2
Unit number
Network
address
Serial Communications Unit’s
serial port unit
address: 153
(decimal)
Serial port network address: 5
(decimal)
• Host Link FINS Settings
Command Frame
Item
FINS command code (e.g., change
operating mode (stop operation))
Setting
0402 hex
FINS command parameter (e.g.,
always FFFF hex to change operating
mode)
FFFF hex
Setting location
Set in 0402 hex of control
data S for CMND(490)
instruction
Set in FFFF hex of control
data s+1 for CMND(490)
instruction
Response Frame
Item
Setting
FINS command code (E.g., change
0402 hex
operating mode (stop operation))
FINS command end code (normal end: 0000 hex
0000 hex)
[CMND
S
D
Setting location
Stored in D of CMND(490)
instruction
Stored in D+1 of CMND(490)
instruction
C]
95
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
Command Details
Operand Offset
Value
S: D01000 +0:
0402 hex
+1:
FFFF hex
D: D02000
C: D00000 +0:
000C hex
+1:
000A hex
+2:
0005 hex
+3:
0200 hex
+4:
+5:
0000 hex
0000 hex
Meaning
Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex)
Change operating mode (stop operation): Always FFFF hex
First response storage word
Command data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal)
Response data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal)
Send destination network address: 05 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (not used)
Send destination node address: 02 hex (set the unit number for Host Link + 1); Send
destination unit address: 00 hex
Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex
Response monitoring time: 2 s
Response
Operand Offset
Value
D: D02000 +0:
0402 hex
+1:
FFFF hex
Note
Meaning
Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex)
FINS end code: FFFF hex (normal end)
1. The method used to set the remote destination network address, node address, and unit address for sending data to or receiving data from the PC
connected serially via Host Link to another PC on the network (to which
the Serial Communications Board/Unit is mounted) using the SEND(090)/
RECV(098) instructions is the same as for the CMND(490) instruction.
2. When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490) instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one (1
to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word
C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the unit number of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit number
without incrementing by one will access the PC with the entered Host Link
unit number less one.
For example, specify remote PC with Host Link unit number 2 by entering
3 for the remote destination node address. If the 2 is entered, the PC with
Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed.
To access a PC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway
from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number,
without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link SYSWAY
Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide dialog box.
Sending Modbus-ASCII Commands
• Set the FINS command code of 2805 hex in S, indicating conversion to
Modbus-RTU.
• In S+1 onwards, set the slave address (2 bytes ASCII) + FUNCTION code
(2 bytes ASCII) + communications data (2 × n bytes ASCII) from leftmost
bytes to rightmost bytes using ASCII.
Sending CompoWay/F Commands
• Set the FINS command code of 2803 hex in S, indicating conversion to
CompoWay/F.
• In S+1 onwards, set the CompoWay/F node number (2 bytes ASCII) +
sub-address (2 bytes ASCII) + SID (1 byte ASCII) + CompoWay/F command MRC (2 bytes ASCII) + CompoWay/F command SRC (2 bytes
96
Communications Frames
Section 3-7
ASCII) + text (2
using ASCII.
Note
× n bytes ASCII) from leftmost bytes to rightmost bytes
Set the contents of S+3 when using CompoWay/F commands as follows:
Set the SID “0” as ASCII 30 hex (1 byte) in the leftmost byte, and the leftmost
digit of the CompoWay/F command code MRC as ASCII (1 byte) in the rightmost byte. Next, set the bits of S+4 as follows:
Set the rightmost digits of the CompoWay/F command code MRC as ASCII in
the leftmost byte, and the leftmost digit of the CompoWay/F command code
SRC as ASCII (1 byte) in the rightmost byte. Be sure to set one byte each for
the subsequent data without any blank bytes.
97
Communications Frames
98
Section 3-7
SECTION 4
C-mode Commands
This section provides detailed descriptions of the C-mode commands.
4-1
4-2
4-3
C-mode Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-mode Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 About this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 CIO AREA READ – – RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 LR AREA READ – – RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 HR AREA READ – – RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-5 TIMER/COUNTER PV READ – – RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-6 TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ – – RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-7 DM AREA READ – – RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-8 AR AREA READ – – RJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-9 EM AREA READ – – RE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-10 CIO AREA WRITE – – WR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-11 LR AREA WRITE – – WL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-12 HR AREA WRITE – – WH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-13 TIMER/COUNTER PV WRITE – – WC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-14 DM AREA WRITE – – WD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-15 AR AREA WRITE – – WJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-16 EM AREA WRITE – – WE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-17 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 1 – – R# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-18 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 2 – – R$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-19 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 3 – – R% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-20 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 1 – – W# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-21 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 2 – – W$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-22 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 3 – – W% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-23 STATUS READ – – MS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-24 STATUS CHANGE – – SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-25 ERROR READ – – MF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-26 FORCED SET – – KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-27 FORCED RESET – – KR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-28 MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET – – FK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-29 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL – – KC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-30 PLC MODEL READ – – MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-31 TEST– – TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-32 PROGRAM READ – – RP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-33 PROGRAM WRITE – – WP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-34 I/O TABLE GENERATE – – MI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-35 REGISTER I/O MEMORY – – QQMR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-36 READ I/O MEMORY – – QQIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-37 ABORT – – XZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-38 INITIALIZE – – ** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-39 Undefined Command – – IC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
103
105
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
124
127
128
130
133
134
135
137
138
139
140
141
142
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
148
99
C-mode Command List
4-1
Section 4-1
C-mode Command List
The following table lists the C-mode commands (Host Link commands).
Type
I/O memory
reading
I/O memory
writing
Timer/counter SV
reading
100
Header
code
RR
Name
CIO AREA READ
RL
LR AREA READ
RH
HR AREA READ
RC
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ
RG
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ
RD
DM AREA READ
RJ
AR AREA READ
RE
EM AREA READ
WR
CIO AREA WRITE
WL
LR AREA WRITE
WH
HR AREA WRITE
WC
TIMER/COUNTER PV WRITE
WD
DM AREA WRITE
WJ
AR AREA WRITE
WE
EM AREA WRITE
R#
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 1
R$
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 2
R%
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 3
Function
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated CIO word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated LR word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated HR word.
Reads the specified number of words of the timer/
counter PV beginning with the designated word.
Reads the specified number of words of the timer/
counter status beginning with the designated word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated DM word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated AR word.
Reads the specified number of words beginning with
the designated EM word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated CIO word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated LR word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated HR word.
Writes the specified timer/counter PV data in word
units beginning with the designated word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated DM word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated AR word.
Writes the specified data in word units beginning
with the designated EM word.
Reads in four digits BCD the constant SV that is
written as an operand of the designated timer/
counter instruction.
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning with the designated program address, and
reads the constant SV in four digits or the word in
which the SV is stored.
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning with the designated program address, and
reads the constant SV in four digits (BCD) or the
word in which the SV is stored.
C-mode Command List
Type
Timer/counter SV
changing
Section 4-1
Header
code
Name
Function
W#
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 1
W$
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 2
W%
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 3
MS
STATUS READ
SC
MF
STATUS CHANGE
ERROR READ
KS
KR
FK
FORCED SET
FORCED RESET
MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET
KC
MM
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
PLC MODEL READ
TS
TEST
Returns, just as it is, a single block that was sent
from the host computer.
RP
PROGRAM READ
WP
PROGRAM WRITE
I/O table creation
MI
I/O TABLE CREATE
I/O memory area
registration and
reading
QQMR
REGISTER I/O MEMORY
QQIR
READ I/O MEMORY
Reads, in one batch, the contents of the CPU Unit’s
user program at the machine language (object)
level.
Writes into the CPU Unit’s user program area the
machine language (object) sent from the host computer.
Creates an I/O table with the contents of the actual
I/O configuration.
Registers the I/O memory words or bits that are to
be read.
Reads the registered I/O memory words/bits all at
once.
Aborts the operation being performed by a Host Link
command, and then returns to the initial status.
Initializes the transfer control procedures for all Host
Link Units.
This is the response when the command header
code cannot be decoded.
CPU Unit status
Forced set/reset
PLC model code
reading
Testing
Program area
accessing
Host Link commu- XZ
nications
processing
**
IC
ABORT (command only)
INITIALIZE (command only)
Undefined command (response
only)
Changes the SV (timer/counter number S) of the
specified timer/counter instruction to a new constant
SV.
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning with the designated program address in the
user program, and changes the constant SV in four
digits (BCD) or the word in which the SV is stored to
a new constant SV or storage word.
Finds the specified timer/counter instruction, beginning with the designated program address in the
user program, and changes the constant SV in four
digits (BCD) or the word in which the SV is stored to
a new constant SV or storage word.
Reads the CPU Unit’s operating conditions (operating mode, forced set/reset status, and fatal errors).
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode.
Reads the CPU Unit’s error information (i.e., all fatal
or non-fatal errors currently in effect).
Forcibly sets one designated bit.
Forcibly resets one designated bit.
Forcibly sets/resets/cancels multiple designated
bits.
Cancels all forced set/reset status.
Reads the model code of the CPU Unit.
101
C-mode Command List
Section 4-1
C-mode Command Force Conditions
Singleframe
response
Multipleframe
response
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
HR AREA WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
WC
PV WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
WD
DM AREA WRITE Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
WJ
AR AREA WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
WE
EM AREA WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
R#
SV READ 1
Valid
Not valid
Valid
R$
SV READ 2
Valid
Not valid
R%
SV READ 3
Valid
W#
SV CHANGE 1
W$
Header
code
Name
RR
RL
RH
RC
RG
RD
RJ
RE
WR
Singleframe
command
CIO AREA READ Valid
LR AREA READ
Valid
HR AREA READ
Valid
PV READ
Valid
TC STATUS READ Valid
DM AREA READ Valid
AR AREA READ
Valid
EM AREA READ Valid
CIO AREA WRITE Valid
WL
LR AREA WRITE
WH
Multipleframe
command
RUN
MON
PRG
UM
write
protect
UM
read
protect
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
SV CHANGE 2
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
W%
SV CHANGE 3
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
MS
SC
MF
KS
STATUS READ
STATUS CHANGE
ERROR READ
FORCED SET
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
KR
FORCED RESET
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
FK
MULTIPLE
FORCED
SET/RESET
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
KC
FORCED SET/
RESET CANCEL
PLC MODEL
READ
TEST
PROGRAM READ
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
MM
TS
RP
102
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not
valid
End Codes
Header
code
WP
MI
QQMR
QQIR
XZ
**
IC
4-2
Section 4-2
Name
PROGRAM
WRITE
I/O TABLE
GENERATE
READ I/O MEMORY
REGISTER I/O
MEMORY
ABORT
(command only)
INITIALIZE
(command only)
Undefined command (response
only)
Single- Multipleframe
frame
com- command
mand
Singleframe
response
Multipleframe
response
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
RUN
PRG
Valid
UM
write
protect
UM
read
protect
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Not
valid
Not
valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
End Codes
End Code Summary
These are the response (end) codes that are returned in the response frame.
When two or more errors occur, the end code for the first error will be
returned.
End
Contents
code
00
Normal completion
01
Not executable in RUN mode
02
Not executable in MONITOR mode
03
UM write-protected
04
Address over
Probable cause
Corrective measures
No problem exists.
The command that was sent cannot
be executed when the PLC is in RUN
mode.
The command that was sent cannot
be executed when the PLC is in
MONITOR mode.
The PLC’s UM is write-protected.
--Check the relation between the command and the PLC mode.
13
The program address setting in an
read or write command is above the
highest program address.
Not executable in PROGRAM mode The command that was sent cannot
be executed when the PLC is in
PROGRAM mode.
FCS error
The FCS is wrong.
14
Format error
15
Entry number data error
16
Command not supported
0B
MON
Turn OFF pin 1 of the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch (SW1).
Check the program.
This code is not currently used.
Check the FCS calculation method. If
there was influence from noise,
transfer the command again.
The command format is wrong, or a Check the format and transfer the
command that cannot be divided has command again.
been divided, or the frame length is
smaller than the minimum length for
the applicable command.
Correct the data and transfer the
The data is outside of the specified
command again.
range or too long.
Hexadecimal data has not been
specified.
The operand specified in an SV
Check search data or the search
Read or SV Change command does starting point.
not exist in the program.
103
End Codes
End
code
Section 4-2
Contents
Probable cause
18
Frame length error
19
Not executable
20
Could not create I/O table
21
Not executable due to CPU Unit
CPU error (See note.)
23
User memory protected
A3
Aborted due to FCS error in transmission data
A4
Aborted due to format error in
transmission data
A5
A8
The maximum frame length of 131
bytes was exceeded.
(If the frame exceeds 280 bytes, the
Reception Overflow Flag will be
turned ON and there will not be a
response.)
The read SV exceeded 9,999, or an
I/O memory batch read was executed when items to read were not
registered for composite command,
or access right was not obtained.
Unrecognized Remote I/O Unit, too
many I/O words, or word duplication
used.
The command cannot be executed
because a CPU error has occurred in
the CPU Unit.
The UM is read-protected or writeprotected.
Corrective measures
Check the command and divide it
into multiple frames if necessary.
Register items to read before
attempting batch read, or obtain
access right.
Check the Remote I/O System, the
number of I/O words, and the words
used.
Cycle the CPU Unit’s power supply.
Clear write-protection by setting pin 1
of the DIP switch on the front of the
CPU Unit to OFF. Alternatively, clear
the CPU Unit’s password-protection
using CX-Programmer.
An FCS error occurred in the second Correct the command data and
or later frame, or there were two
transfer the command again.
bytes or less of data in an intermediate or final frame for multiple writing.
The command format did not match
the number of bytes in the second or
later frame.
Aborted due to entry number data There was an entry number data
error in transmission data
error in the second or later frame, a
data length error, or data was not set
in hexadecimal.
Aborted due to frame length error in The length of the second and later
transmission data
frames exceeded the maximum of
128 bytes.
Note Occurs only for a Serial Communications Unit/Board.
A response will not be received with some errors, regardless of the command.
These errors are listed in the following table.
Error
A command is received with eight bytes or less
from the @ to the delimiter.
Parity, overrun, or framing error during command reception. (Same even for commands
address to other Units.)
PLC operation
The initial command (4 bytes) executes the initial processing. Other
commands are discarded.
The Communications Error Flag will be turned ON, an error code will be
registered, and receptions will be reset. (The error will be cleared automatically if communications restart normally.)
A command is received that does not have the
@ character at the beginning of the first frame.
Incorrect node number (Not a local unit, BCD,
or over 31)
An LF code is received after the delimiter.
The command is discarded.
104
The command is discarded.
The LF code is discarded.
C-mode Command Details
Command/End Code Table
Header
RR
RL
RH
RC
RG
RD
RJ
RE
WR
WL
WH
WC
WD
WJ
WE
R#
R$
R%
W#
W$
W%
MS
SC
MF
KS
KR
FK
KC
MM
TS
RP
WP
MI
QQMR
QQIR
XZ
**
IC
4-3
4-3-1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
The following table shows which end codes can be returned for each C-mode
command.
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
04
04
04
04
04
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
01
01
02
02
03
Section 4-3
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Possible End Codes
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15 16 18
14 15 16 18
14 15 16 18
14 15 16 18
14 15 16 18
14 15 16 18
14
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14 15
18
14
18
14
18
14
18
14 15
18
14
18
14 15
18
14
18
-------
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
27
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
20
21
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A3
A4
A5
A8
A3
A4
A5
A8
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
Comments
----------------------------------------------------------------------No response
No response
No end code
C-mode Command Details
About this Section
With C-mode command and response formats, a single character is indicated
by a single box. Each character is sent and received as a single byte in ASCII.
Execution Conditions
The Execution Conditions table at the beginning of the description of each
command provides the following information.
105
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Commands, Single
Single command frames are used when there are 131 characters or less.
Commands, Multiple
Tells whether the command can be spit into multiple frames when there are
more than 131 characters.
Responses, Single
Single response frames are used when there are 131 characters or less.
Responses, Multiple
Tells whether the response can be spit into multiple frames when there are
more than 131 characters.
PLC Modes, RUN
Tells if the CPU Unit will accept the command when the CPU Unit is in RUN
mode.
PLC Modes, MONITOR
Tells if the CPU Unit will accept the command when the CPU Unit is in MONITOR mode.
PLC Modes, PROGRAM
Tells if the CPU Unit will accept the command when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
UM Area, Write-protected
Tells if the CPU Unit will accept the command when the UM Area is write-protected using the DIP switch on the CPU Unit.
UM Area, Read-protected
Tells if the CPU Unit will accept the command when the UM Area is read-protected using a Programming Device.
Note
1. WR Area words cannot be read or written using C-mode commands.
2. Timers 2048 to 4095 and counters 2048 to 4095 cannot be read or written
and their SV cannot be read or written using C-mode commands.
3. D10000 to D32767 and E10000 to E32767 cannot be read or written using
C-mode commands.
4. SV can be read and written only in cyclic task 0. Also, timer SV can be read
and written only when the timer number is not indirectly addressed.
4-3-2
CIO AREA READ – – RR
Reads the contents of the specified number of CIO words starting from the
specified word.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
R x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 6143)
No. of words
(0001 to 6144)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
R
Header
code
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
106
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Limitations
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
4-3-3
PLC Mode
MON
OK
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
LR AREA READ – – RL
Treats CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 as a data link area and reads the contents of the
specified number of words starting from the specified word.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
L
Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Beginning word
(0000 to 0199)
No. of words
(0001 to 0200)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
Limitations
@ x 101 x 100
R
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
L
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
Read data (1 word)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data (for number of words read)
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
107
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Note The command is provided for compatibility with previous models. We recommend using CIO AREA READ (RR) whenever possible.
4-3-4
HR AREA READ – – RH
Reads the contents of the specified number of HR words starting from the
specified word.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
R
H
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0511)
No. of words
(0001 to 0512)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
Limitations
R
H
Header
code
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
*
Read data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data (for number of words read)
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
108
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
4-3-5
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ – – RC
Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/counter PVs (present values T0000 to T2047 or C0000 to C2047) starting from the specified timer/
counter.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
C x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Header
code
Beginning word:
Timer (0000 to 2047)
Counter (2048 to 4095)
No. of words
(0001 to 2048)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
R
C x 161 x 160 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Header
code
End code
*
FCS
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
↵
Terminator
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Designate 0000 to 2047 for timers and 2048 to 4095 for counters (add 2048 to
the actual counter number).
Timers 2048 to 4095 and counters 2048 to 4095 cannot be read.
Commands are divided among timers and counters for execution. If an
attempt is made to designate across timers and counters, an end code of 15
(entry number data error) will be returned.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
109
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
4-3-6
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ – – RG
Reads the ON/OFF status of the Completion Flags of the specified number of
timers/counters starting from the designated word (T0000 to T2047 or C0000
to C2047).
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
G x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
R
Header
code
Beginning word:
No. of words
Timer (0000 to 2047)
(0001 to 2048)
Counter (2048 to 4095)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
R
G x 161 x 160
Header
code
*
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data
(1 word)
Read data
(for number of words read)
1: ON
0: OFF
Limitations
The number of words per frame for response data is different to that for Cseries Units. For details refer to 2-4 Precautions when Reusing Programs
from Earlier Models.
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 121 words. If
more than 121 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 124 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Designate 0000 to 2047 for timers and 2048 to 4095 for counters (add 2048 to
the actual counter number).
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
Commands are divided with regard to timers and counters. If an attempt is
made to designate across timers and counters, an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned.
110
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
4-3-7
PLC Mode
MON
OK
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
DM AREA READ – – RD
Reads the contents of the specified number of DM words starting from the
specified word (D00000 to D09999).
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
R
D x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
No. of words
(0001 to 9999)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
Limitations
R
D x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Header
code
End code
*
Read data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data (for number of words read)
The DM Area is comprised of D00000 to D32767, but the range that can be
read by this command is D00000 to D09999.
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
111
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
4-3-8
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
AR AREA READ – – RJ
Reads the contents of the specified number of Auxiliary Area words (A000 to
A959) starting from the specified word.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
R
J
Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Beginning word
(0000 to 0959)
No. of words
(0001 to 0960)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
Limitations
R
J
Header
code
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
Read data (1 word)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data
(for number of words read)
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, or are not specified in
BCD, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
112
PLC Mode
MON
OK
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
C-mode Command Details
4-3-9
Section 4-3
EM AREA READ – – RE
Reads the contents of the specified number of EM words (E00000 to E09999)
starting from the specified word in the specified EM bank.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
R
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
E
Bank No.
Bank No.
(See note.)
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
No. of words
(0001 to 9999)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Note Input 00, 01, or 0C to specify bank number 0, 1, or C. Input two spaces to
specify the current bank.
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
R
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
Limitations
E
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
*
Read data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Read data (for number of words read)
A single bank of EM consists of E00000 to E32767, but the range that can be
read by this command is E00000 to E09999.
The maximum EM bank number that can be specified is 12 (0C Hex).
The text portion of the response’s first frame can contain up to 30 words. If
more than 30 words are read, the data will be returned in multiple frames.
In the second and later frames, the text portion of the response can contain
up to 31 words.
This command cannot be used to change the current bank number.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect and an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if
the specified words exceed the data area boundaries, the specified words are
not specified in BCD, or an invalid bank number is specified. An end code of
15 will also be returned if there are no banks and file memory access is not
possible, or if the number of words to read is 0.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
113
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-10 CIO AREA WRITE – – WR
Writes data to the CIO Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 6143) starting from the specified word. Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
W
R
Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(0000 to 6143)
*
Write data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
x 161 x 160
Header
code
End code
W
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect or the first word of write data is not in the first frame.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundaries, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
114
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-11 LR AREA WRITE – – WL
Writes data to the Link Area (CIO 1000 to CIO 1199) starting from the specified word. Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
W
L
Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(000 to 0199)
*
FCS
Write data (1 word)
↵
Terminator
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Response Forma
@ x 101 x 100
W
L
x 161 x 160
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
End code
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
Note The command is provided for compatibility with previous models. We recommend using CIO AREA WRITE (WR) whenever possible.
115
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-12 HR AREA WRITE – – WH
Writes data to the HR Area (H000 to H511) starting from the specified word.
Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
W
H
Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(0000 to 0511)
*
Write data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
W
H
Header
code
x 161 x 160
End code
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect or the first word of write data is not in the first frame.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
116
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-13 TIMER/COUNTER PV WRITE – – WC
Writes the PVs (present values T0000 to T2047 or C0000 to C2047) of timers/
counters starting from the specified word.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
C
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
Timer (0000 to 2047)
Counter (2048 to 4095)
*
FCS
Write data (1 word)
↵
Terminator
Write data
(for number of PV to write)
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
W
C
Header
code
x 161 x 160
End code
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Commands are divided with regard to timers and counters. If an attempt is
made to designate across timers and counters, an end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
117
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-14 DM AREA WRITE – – WD
Writes data to the DM Area starting from the specified word (D00000 to
D09999). Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
D
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
*
Write data (1 word)
↵
Terminator
FCS
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
D
x 161 x 160
Header
code
End code
W
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
The DM Area is comprised of D00000 to D32767, but the range that can be
read by this command is D00000 to D09999.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect or the first word of write data is not in the first frame.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
118
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-15 AR AREA WRITE – – WJ
Writes data to the Auxiliary Area (A448 to A959) starting from the specified
word. Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
J
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(0448 to 0959)
*
Write data (1 word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
J
x 161 x 160
Header
code
End code
W
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect or the first word of write data is not in the first frame.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. (An end code of A5 will be
returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data in multiple command
frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
119
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-16 EM AREA WRITE – – WE
Writes data to the specified EM Area bank starting from the specified word
(E00000 to E09999). Writing is done in word units.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
E
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
Bank No.
Bank No.
(See note.)
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
*
Write data (1 word)
↵
Terminator
FCS
Write data
(for number of words to write)
Note Input 00 to 0C to specify bank number 0 to C. Input two spaces to specify the
current bank.
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
E
x 161 x 160
Header
code
End code
W
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
The range that can be designated is E0000 to E9999. A single bank of EM
consists of E00000 to E32767, but the range that can be written by this command is E00000 to E09999.
The maximum EM bank number that can be specified is 12 (0C Hex).
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect or the first word of write data is not in the first frame.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data exceeds the data area boundary, the beginning word is not specified in BCD, or the write data is not hexadecimal. An end code of 15 will also
be returned if there are no banks and file memory access is not possible. (An
end code of A5 will be returned instead of 15 for non-hexadecimal write data
in multiple command frames.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
A3
A4
A5
A8
120
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-17 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 1 – – R#
Reads the constant SV (4 digits BCD) written in the operands of designated
timer/counter instructions from cyclic task 0. If there are multiple timer/counter
instructions designated in cyclic task 0, TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 1 will
read the SV of the designated instruction with the lowest program address.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
R
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
#
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
Timer/counter
number
Timer/counter type
Instruction name
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
*
↵
Terminator
FCS
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter
number
(BCD)
CharCharCharCharacter 1 acter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
0000 to 2047
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Parameters
R
#
Header
code
x 161 x 160 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
End code
SV of instruction designated by command
(constant)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate in ASCII characters the type of TC instruction for reading the constant SV.
Timer Counter Number (Command)
Designate in four digits (BCD) the timer/counter number for reading the constant SV.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
The second word of the instruction must be a constant.
This command cannot be executed while UM read protection is in effect.
If there are multiple relevant instructions in the UM Area, a search will be conducted from program address 0, and the first instruction found will be read.
SV can be read only from cyclic task 0.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
No
121
C-mode Command Details
End Codes
Section 4-3
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the timer/
counter type or timer/counter number is out of range (including hexadecimal
data).
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the UM Area.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
16
18
21
23
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
4-3-18 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 2 – – R$
From the specified program address onwards in cyclic task 0, TIMER/
COUNTER SV READ 2 finds the specified timer/counter instruction and reads
the 4-digit constant SV that is set or the word address where the SV is stored.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
R
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
$
Program address
(BCD)
Timer/counter
number (BCD)
Timer/counter type
Instruction name
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
FCS
↵
Terminator
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter
CharCharCharChar- number (BCD)
acter 1 acter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
0000 to 2047
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
122
*
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
$
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
End code
Constant/area
classification
Classification
Constant
CIO
AR
HR
WR
Timer
Counter
DM
DM (indirect)
SV/word address
FCS
Constant/area classification
Charac- Charac- Charac- Character 1
ter 2
ter 3
ter 4
C
O
N
(SP)
C
I
O
(SP)
A
R
(SP)
(SP)
H
R
(SP)
(SP)
W
R
(SP)
(SP)
T
I
M
(SP)
C
N
T
(SP)
D
M
(SP)
(SP)
D
M
(SP)
*
↵
Terminator
SV or word
address
0000 to 9999
0000 to 6143
0000 to 0959
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
0000 to 2047
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
EM current bank
EM (indirect) current
bank
E
E
M
M
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 9999
*
(SP)
0000 to 9999
EM banks 0 to C
EM (indirect) banks 0 to
C
Data register
Index register (indirect)
E
E
M
M
0 to C
0 to C
(SP)
*
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
D
,
R
I
(SP)
R
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0015
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Parameters
Program Address (Command)
Designates the program address in four digits decimal (BCD) for beginning
the search for the specified timer/counter.
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate in ASCII characters the timer/counter instruction type for reading
the constant SV or the word address in which it is stored.
Timer/Counter Number (Command)
Designate in four digits (BCD) the timer/counter instruction number for reading the constant SV or the word address in which it is stored. (Data register
designation is not possible.)
Constant/Area Classification (Response)
The constant or I/O memory area classification is returned, in ASCII, to this
parameter.
SV/Word Address (Response)
The constant SV or the word address in which it is stored is returned to this
parameter.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
The SV of the first timer/counter found after the designated program address
will be read.
If the SV is outside of range for the timer/counter type or number, an end code
of 16 (command not supported) will be returned.
123
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
If the SV is a DM or EM indirect address, only indirect BCD designations will
be read and an end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if
the indirect designation is not BCD.
SV can be read only from cyclic task 0.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
No
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the program
address is not specified in BCD or the operand/SV parameters are incorrect.
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the UM Area.
End code (Hex)
00
04
13
14
15
16
18
21
23
Contents
Normal completion
Address over
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
4-3-19 TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 3 – – R%
From the specified program address onwards in cyclic task 0, TIMER/
COUNTER SV READ 3 finds the specified TC instruction and reads the constant SV that is set or the word address where the SV is stored. The SV that is
read is a 4-digit decimal number (BCD).
124
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
%
Header
code
x 105 x 104 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Program address
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter number
*
FCS
Instruction name
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
↵
Terminator
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter
number
CharCharCharCharacter 1 acter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
0000 to 2047
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
R
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
%
*
x 161 x 160 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
End code
Constant/area
classification
Classification
SV/word address
FCS
↵
Terminator
Constant
CIO
AR
Constant/area classification
Constant or
Charac- Charac- Charac- Charac- word address
ter 1
ter 2
ter 3
ter 4
C
O
N
(SP)
0000 to 9999
C
I
O
(SP)
0000 to 6143
A
R
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0959
HR
WR
Timer
Counter
DM
DM (indirect)
H
W
T
C
D
D
R
R
I
N
M
M
(SP)
(SP)
M
T
(SP)
EM current bank
EM (indirect) current
bank
EM banks 0 to C
EM (indirect) banks 0 to
C
E
E
M
M
(SP)
E
E
M
M
Data register
Index register (indirect)
D
,
R
I
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
0000 to 2047
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0 to C
0 to C
(SP)
0000 to 9999
*
0000 to 9999
(SP)
R
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0015
*
*
125
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Parameters
Program Address (Command)
Designates the program address in six digits decimal (BCD) for beginning the
search for the specified timer/counter.
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction type for reading the constant SV or the
word address in which it is stored.
Timer/Counter Number (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction number for reading the constant SV or
the word address in which it is stored. (Index register designation is not possible.)
Constant/Area Classification (Response)
The constant or I/O memory area classification is returned, in ASCII, to this
parameter.
SV/Word Address (Response)
The constant SV or the word address in which it is stored is returned to this
parameter.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
The SV of the first timer/counter found after the designated program address
will be read.
If the SV is outside of range for the timer/counter type or number, an end code
of 16 (command not supported) will be returned.
If the SV is a DM or EM indirect address, only indirect BCD designations will
be read and an end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if
the indirect designation is not BCD.
SV can be read only from cyclic task 0.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
No
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the program
address is not specified in BCD, or if the timer/counter type or number is out of
range (including hexadecimal data).
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the program.
End code (Hex)
00
04
13
14
15
16
18
21
23
126
Contents
Normal completion
Address over
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-20 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 1 – – W#
Changes the SV of the designated timer/counter instruction to a new constant
SV.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
#
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Timer/counter
number
Timer/counter type
Instruction name
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
SV (0000 to 9999 (BCD)) FCS
*
↵
Terminator
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter
CharCharCharChar- number (BCD)
acter 1 acter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
0000 to 2047
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Parameters
W
#
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction type for changing the constant SV.
Timer/Counter Number (Command)
Designate in four digits BCD the timer/counter instruction number for changing the constant SV. (Index register designation is not possible.)
New Constant SV (Command)
Designate the new constant SV in four digits hexadecimal.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
The command cannot be executed unless the SV is a constant.
If there are multiple relevant instructions in cyclic task 0, a search will be conducted from program address 0, and the first instruction found will be read.
The SV can be changed only in cyclic task 0.
If the SV is a DM or EM indirect address, only indirect BCD designations will
be read and an end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if
the indirect designation is not BCD.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
No
No
127
C-mode Command Details
End Codes
Section 4-3
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the program
address is not specified in BCD, or if the timer/counter type or number is out of
range (including hexadecimal data).
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the UM Area.
End code (Hex)
00
01
04
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Address over
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
4-3-21 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 2 – – W$
From the specified program address onwards in cyclic task 0, TIMER/
COUNTER SV CHANGE 2 finds the specified timer/counter instruction and
changes the 4-digit constant SV (BCD) that is set, or the word address where
the SV is stored, to a newly designated constant SV or storage word address.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
$
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Program
address
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter number
*
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Constant/area classification
Instruction name
Character 1
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
128
FCS
New SV/word address
Timer/counter type
CharCharCharacter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
↵
Terminator
Timer/counter
number
0000 to 2047
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Classification
Constant
CIO
AR
HR
WR
Timer
Counter
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant/area classification
Charac- Charac- Charac- Character 1
ter 2
ter 3
ter 4
C
O
N
(SP)
C
I
O
(SP)
A
R
(SP)
(SP)
H
R
(SP)
(SP)
W
R
(SP)
(SP)
T
I
M
(SP)
C
N
T
(SP)
D
M
(SP)
(SP)
D
M
(SP)
*
EM current bank
EM (indirect) current
bank
EM banks 0 to C
EM (indirect) 0 to C
E
E
M
M
(SP)
E
E
M
M
Data register
Index register
D
,
R
I
SV or word
address
(BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 6143
0000 to 0959
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
0000 to 2047
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0 to C
0 to C
(SP)
0000 to 9999
*
0000 to 9999
(SP)
R
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0015
*
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
$
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
Parameters
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Program Address (Command)
Designate the program address in four digits decimal (BCD) for beginning the
search for the specified timer/counter instruction.
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction type for changing the constant SV or
the word address in which it is stored.
Timer/Counter Number (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction number for reading the constant SV.
(Index register designation is not possible.) The range that can be designated
is the same as for R#.
Constant/Area Classification (Command)
Designate the ASCII characters to express the new SV area classification or
constant.
New SV/Word Address (Command)
Designate the newly set constant SV or the word address in which it is stored.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be read.
The SV of the first timer/counter found after the designated program address
will be read.
If the SV is outside of range for the timer/counter type or number, an end code
of 16 (command not supported) will be returned.
129
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
If the SV is a DM or EM indirect address, only indirect BCD designations will
be read and an end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if
the indirect designation is not BCD.
The SV can be changed only in cyclic task 0.
The maximum EM bank number that can be specified is 12 (0C Hex).
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
No
No
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the program
address is not BCD, or if the timer/counter type or number is out of range
(including hexadecimal data).
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the UM Area.
End code (Hex)
00
01
04
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Address over
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
4-3-22 TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 3 – – W%
From the specified program address onwards in cyclic task 0, TIMER/
COUNTER SV CHANGE 3 finds the specified timer/counter instruction and
changes the 4-digit constant SV (BCD) that is set, or the word address where
the SV is stored, to a newly designated constant SV or storage word address.
130
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
%
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
x 105 x 104 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Program address
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter number
*
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Constant/area classification
Instruction name
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
WAIT
TIMER WAIT
COUNTER WAIT
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TOTALIZING TIMER
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TIMER
COUNTER
FCS
New SV/word address
↵
Terminator
Timer/counter type
Timer/counter
number
CharCharCharCharacter 1 acter 2 acter 3 acter 4
T
M
H
W
0000 to 2047
T
C
T
T
C
T
C
I
N
I
T
N
I
N
M
T
M
I
T
M
T
W
W
H
M
R
(SP)
(SP)
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Classification
Constant
CIO
AR
HR
WR
Timer
Counter
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant/area classification
Charac- Charac- Charac- Character 1
ter 2
ter 3
ter 4
C
O
N
(SP)
C
I
O
(SP)
A
R
(SP)
(SP)
H
R
(SP)
(SP)
W
R
(SP)
(SP)
T
I
M
(SP)
C
N
T
(SP)
D
M
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
D
M
*
SV or word
address
(BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 6143
0000 to 0959
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
0000 to 2047
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
EM current bank
EM (indirect) current
bank
E
E
M
M
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 9999
*
(SP)
0000 to 9999
EM banks 0 to C
EM (indirect) 0 to C
E
E
M
M
0 to C
0 to C
(SP)
0000 to 9999
*
0000 to 9999
Data register
Index register
D
,
R
I
(SP)
R
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0015
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
131
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Parameters
W
%
Header
code
x 161 x 160
End code
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
Program Address (Command)
Designate the program address in six digits decimal (BCD) for beginning the
search for the specified timer/counter instruction.
Timer/Counter Type (Command)
Designate the timer/counter instruction type, in ASCII, for changing the constant SV or the word address in which it is stored.
Timer/Counter Number (Command)
Designate in four digits BCD the timer/counter instruction number for reading
the constant SV. (Index register designation is not possible.)
Constant/Area Classification (Command)
Designate the ASCII characters to express the constant or area classification.
New SV/Word Address (Command)
Designate the newly set constant SV or the word address in which it is stored.
Limitations
Timers T2048 to T4095 and counters C2048 to C4095 cannot be changed.
If the SV is a DM or EM indirect address, only indirect BCD designations will
be read and an end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if
the indirect designation is not BCD.
The SV can be changed only in cyclic task 0.
The maximum EM bank number that can be specified is 12 (0C Hex).
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
No
No
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the program
address is not BCD, or if the timer/counter type or number is out of range
(including hexadecimal data).
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if a constant or
area classification is out of range (including hexadecimal data).
An end code of 16 (command not supported) will be returned if the specified
instruction does not exist in the UM Area.
End code (Hex)
00
01
04
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
132
PLC Mode
MON
OK
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Address over
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-23 STATUS READ – – MS
Reads the operating conditions (status) of the CPU Unit.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
M
Header
code
Unit No. (BCD)
*
S
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
M
S
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
Message
Status data
FCS
↵
Terminator
The message is attached only
when there is a FAL/FALS message
(always 16 characters)
“Status data” consists of four digits (two bytes) hexadecimal. The leftmost byte
indicates the CPU Unit operation mode, and the rightmost byte indicates the
size of the program area.
x 163
Bit
x 162
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
Bit
x 161
Bit
7
6
5
Operation mode
9
8
0
0
PROGRAM mode
1
0
RUN mode
1
1
MONITOR mode
x 160
4
0
3
2
0
Bit
1
0
0
0
Program area
6
5
4
0
0
1
10K steps
0
1
0
20K steps
0
1
1
30K steps
1
0
0
60K steps
1
0
1
120K steps
1
1
0
250K steps
1: UM not write-protected
0: UM write-protected
(In the case of a CJ2 CPU Unit, this is fixed at 111)
Parameters
Message (Response)
The message for any FAL/FALS occurring during command execution will be
returned.
133
C-mode Command Details
Limitations
Section 4-3
RUN mode and MONITOR mode designations differ from those in STATUS
WRITE.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-24 STATUS CHANGE – – SC
Changes the CPU Unit operating mode.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
C
x 161 x 160
Header
code
Mode data
S
Unit No. (BCD)
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
“Mode data” consists of two digits (one byte) hexadecimal. With the leftmost
two bits, specify the CPU Unit operating mode. Set all of the remaining bits to
“0.”
x 161
Bit
7
0
6
5
0 0
x 160
4
3
2
0
0
0
1
0
Bit
Operation mode
1
0
0
0
PROGRAM mode
1
0
MONITOR mode
1
1
RUN mode
This area is different
from that of STATUS
READ.
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
134
S
C
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
RUN mode and MONITOR mode designations differ from those in STATUS
READ.
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the mode data
is out of range.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
19
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-25 ERROR READ – – MF
Reads CPU Unit error information.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
F
x 101 x 100
Header
code
Error clear
M
*
FCS
↵
Terminator
For the “error clear” parameter, specify 01 to clear errors and 00 to not clear
errors (BCD).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
M
F
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160 x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
End code
Error information
(1st word)
Error information
(2nd word)
FCS
↵
Terminator
135
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
1st word
x 163
x 162
Bit 15 14 13 12
0
0
11
10
0
x 161
9
7
8
6
x 160
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Battery error (A40204)
1: Special I/O Unit error (OR of A40206 and A40207)
1: FAL generated (A40215)
1: Memory error (A40115)
1: I/O bus error (A40114)
1: No end instruction error (FALS) (A40109 Program error)
1: System error (FALS) (A40106)
2nd word
x 163
Bit 15 14 13 12
x 162
11 10
0
x 161
9
8
0
0
7
6
x 160
5
4
3
2
1
0
FAL, FALS No. (00 to 99 BCD)
1: I/O verify error (A40209)
1: Cycle time overrun (A40108)
1: Number duplication (A40113)
1: I/O setting error (A40110)
1: SYSMAC BUS error (A40205)
Limitations
Only FAL and FALS numbers 0 to 99 can be read. For numbers 100 to 511,
FAL/FALS number 00 will be set.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the error clear
parameter is not set to 00 or 01.
End code (Hex)
00
01
02
13
14
15
18
136
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Not executable in MONITOR mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
End code (Hex)
19
21
Contents
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-26 FORCED SET – – KS
Force sets the operating status of operands. (Only one bit at a time can be
force set.)
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
K
S
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
*
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 101 x 100
Area classification
Classification
Bit
Word address
FCS
↵
Terminator
CIO
Area classification
Word
address
Charac- Charac- Charac- Character 1
ter 2
ter 3
ter 4
C
I
O
(SP)
0000 to 6143
LR
WR
HR
Timer
L
W
H
T
R
R
R
I
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
M
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
0000 to 0199
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
Counter
C
N
T
(SP)
0000 to 2047
Bit
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to15
00 to 15
Always
00
Always
00
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
K
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
S
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect, or if the bit is designated as other than 00 by the TIM/CNT designation.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the area classification, word address, or bit parameter setting is out of range (including hexadecimal data).
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
137
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-27 FORCED RESET – – KR
Force resets the operating status of operands. (Only one bit at a time can be
force set.)
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
K
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
R
*
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100 x 101 x 100
Area classification
Classification
Bit
Word address
FCS
↵
Terminator
Character 4
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
Word
address
CIO
LR
WR
HR
Timer
Area classification
Charac- Character 2
ter 3
I
O
R
(SP)
R
(SP)
R
(SP)
I
M
Bit
Character 1
C
L
W
H
T
0000 to 6143
0000 to 0199
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
Counter
C
N
(SP)
0000 to 2047
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to15
00 to 15
Always
00
Always
00
T
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
K
R
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect, or if the bit is designated as other than 00 by the TIM/CNT designation.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the area classification, word address, or bit parameter setting is out of range (including hexadecimal data).
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
138
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-28 MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET – – FK
Force sets, resets, or cancels the operating status of operands. (Multiple bits
can be simultaneously force set, reset, or canceled.)
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
F
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
K
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
Word address
Area classification
*
Forced set/reset/cancel data
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
3 2
Classification
CIO
LR
WR
HR
Timer
Counter
10
1
01
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
FCS
00
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
↵
Terminator
Ignore
Designates "0"
Designates "1"
Designates force reset
Designates force set
Designates force set/reset/cancel
Area classification
Character Character Character
1
2
3
C
I
O
L
R
(SP)
W
R
(SP)
H
R
(SP)
T
I
M
C
N
T
Character
4
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
Word
address
0000 to 6143
0000 to 0199
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 2047
0000 to 2047
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
F
K
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Only 15 timers/counters can be set/reset.
LR 0000 to LR 0199 correspond to data link bits CIO 1000 to CIO 1199.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect. (The forced set/reset/cancel data is 16 bytes long.)
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the area classification, word address, or bit parameter setting is incorrect. An end code of 15
139
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
will also be returned if the a data specification of 0 or 1 is used when a timer
or counter is designated.
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-29 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL – – KC
Cancels all forced set and forced reset bits (including those set by FORCED
SET, FORCED RESET, and MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET).
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
K
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
*
C
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
K
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
C
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect. (The forced set/reset/cancel data can be 16 bytes long.)
End code (Hex)
00
01
13
14
15
18
21
140
PLC Mode
MON
OK
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-30 PLC MODEL READ – – MM
Reads the model code of the CPU Unit.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
M
*
M
Header
code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
M
Unit No. (BCD)
Header
code
M
*
x 161 x 160 x 161 x 160
End code
Model
code
FCS
↵
Terminator
“Model code” indicates the model in two digits hexadecimal.
Model code
30
01
02
03
09
0A
0B
0E
10
11
12
20
21
22
40
41
42
Model
CS/CJ
C250
C500
C120/C50
C250F
C500F
C120F
C2000
C1000H
C2000H/CQM1/CPM1
C20H/C28H/C40H, C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE)
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-E
CVM1-CPU11-E
CVM1-CPU21-E
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
18
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
141
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
4-3-31 TEST– – TS
Returns, unaltered, one block of data transmitted from the host computer.
Command Format
Specify any characters other than the carriage return.
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Response Format
T
S
*
122 characters max.
Header
code
FCS
Characters
↵
Terminator
The same characters specified in the command will be returned unaltered if
the test is successful.
@ x 101 x 100
T
S
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
Limitations
*
122 characters max.
FCS
Characters
↵
Terminator
Between 0 and 122 characters can be sent.
If the command is correct, no end code will be returned.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
PLC Mode
MON
OK
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if a terminator is not received
in the first frame.
End code (Hex)
13
14
18
21
Contents
FCS error
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-32 PROGRAM READ – – RP
Reads the contents of the CPU Unit user’s program area in machine language. The contents are read as a block, from the beginning to the end.
Command Format
@
x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
R
*
P
Header
code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
R
P
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
Complete program
FCS
↵
Terminator
The command cannot be executed if the UM Area is read-protected.
Data is read from the beginning of the UM Area to the maximum limit of the
program area.
142
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
The response’s first frame will contain 30 words of program data. The second
and later frames will contain 31 words except for the last frame, which will
contain up to 31 words.
The INITIALIZE and ABORT commands can be sent instead of the delimiter
for multiple responses for this command. If other commands are sent, they will
be treated as delimiters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
RUN
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
No
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
18
19
21
23
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
4-3-33 PROGRAM WRITE – – WP
Writes to the CPU Unit user’s program area the machine language program
transmitted from the host computer. The contents are written as a block, from
the beginning.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
Unit No. (BCD)
P
*
x 161 x 160
Header
code
Complete program
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
W
P
Unit No. (BCD) Header
code
Limitations
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
The command cannot be executed while the UM Area is write-protected.
Data is written from the beginning of the UM Area to the maximum limit of the
program area.
An error will not occur if the command attempts to write program data beyond
the maximum size of the program area.
The program data can be divided into multiple frames in units of 4 characters.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PLC Mode
MON
No
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
No
OK
143
C-mode Command Details
End Codes
Section 4-3
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect (the total size of the program is not a multiple of 8 bytes) or the first
frame contains no program data.
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the specified
write data is not hexadecimal.
End code (Hex)
00
01
02
13
14
15
18
19
21
23
A3
A4
A5
A8
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Not executable in MONITOR mode
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
User memory protected
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
4-3-34 I/O TABLE GENERATE – – MI
Corrects the registered I/O table to match the actual I/O table.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
M
*
I
Header
code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
M
I
Header
code
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
The UM write-protected end code for this command is different from that of
the other commands.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
No
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
No
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
End code (Hex)
00
01
02
03
13
144
PLC Mode
MON
No
Contents
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
Not executable in MONITOR mode
UM write-protected
FCS error
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
End code (Hex)
14
18
19
20
21
Contents
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable
Could not create I/O table
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-35 REGISTER I/O MEMORY – – QQMR
Pre-registers to the table all of the I/O memory area bits, words, and timers/
counters that are to be read. The registered contents are retained until they
are overwritten or until the power is cut off, so they can be read by QQIR.
(Refer to 4-3-36 READ I/O MEMORY – – QQIR.)
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Q
Unit No. (BCD)
Q
M
Header code
x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
R
Area classification
Word address
,
Data break
Bit/word
Bit/word
00 to 15: Bit designation (BCD)
Word: Word data designation (ON/
OFF data only when other than word is
designated by T/C.)
*
3
2
1
0
, OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2
Data break
Area classification
Classification
CIO
LR
AR
HR
WR
Timer
Counter
DM
EM current bank
EM banks 0 to C
Word address
FCS
Bit/word
Area classification
Character Character Character
1
2
3
C
I
O
L
R
(SP)
A
R
(SP)
H
R
(SP)
W
R
(SP)
T
I
M
C
N
T
D
M
(SP)
E
M
(SP)
E
M
0
to
E
M
0
↵
Terminator
Word address
(BCD)
Character
4
(SP)
0000 to 6143
(SP)
0000 to 0199
(SP)
0000 to 0959
(SP)
0000 to 0511
(SP)
0000 to 0511
(SP)
0000 to 2047
(SP)
0000 to 2047
(SP)
0000 to 9999
(SP)
0000 to 9999
0
0000 to 9999
C
Note “SP” represents a space (20 Hex).
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
Q
Q
M
Header code
R
*
x 161 x 160
End code
FCS
↵
Terminator
LR 0000 to LR 0199 correspond to data link bits CIO 1000 to CIO 1199.
145
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
The maximum number of items that can be registered is 128, and timer/
counter word designation is counted as two items.
If all of the registered data is correct, it will be registered to the table.
EM can be read through the current bank or bank designation.
The maximum EM bank number that can be specified is 12 (0C Hex).
Bits and words can be specified in any order and they will be registered in the
order that they were specified.
The data can be divided into multiple frames.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
No
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the “,” data break between
two items is omitted. (The command will be considered correct if there is a “,”
data break just before the FCS or at the beginning of a multiple-frame command.)
An end code of 15 (entry number data error) will be returned if the area classification, word address, or bit/word setting is out of range (including hexadecimal data).
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
15
18
19
A3
A4
A5
A8
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Entry number data error
Frame length error
Not executable
Aborted due to FCS error in transmit data
Aborted due to format error in transmit data
Aborted due to entry number data error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error in transmit data
4-3-36 READ I/O MEMORY – – QQIR
Reads the word and bit data, from multiple I/O memory areas, that was registered with QQMR.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
146
Q
Q
I
Header code
*
R
FCS
↵
Terminator
C-mode Command Details
Section 4-3
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No.
(BCD)
Q
Q
I
R
ON/ x 103 x 102 x 101 x 100
x 161 x 160 OFF
End code Timer/counter word designation: Data break
ON: 1; OFF: 0 + word data (BCD)
Header code
ON/
OFF
,
,
Bit data
ON/OFF
Limitations
,
,
*
x 163 x 162 x 161 x 160
Word data
CIO, LR, AR, HR, WR,
DM, EM and other word
(Hex) data.
FCS
↵
Terminator
The data is read in the same order in which it was registered with QQMR.
Execution Conditions
Commands
Single
Multiple
OK
No
End Codes
Responses
Single
Multiple
OK
OK
RUN
OK
PLC Mode
MON
OK
PROG
OK
UM Area
Write-protected Read-protected
OK
OK
An end code of 14 (format error) will be returned if the length of the command
is incorrect.
An end code of 19 (not executable) will be returned if there is no registered
data.
End code (Hex)
00
13
14
18
19
21
Contents
Normal completion
FCS error
Format error
Frame length error
Not executable
Not executable due to CPU Unit CPU error.
4-3-37 ABORT – – XZ
Aborts the Host Link command that is currently being processed, allowing the
next command to be received.
Command Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
X
*
Z
Header
code
FCS
↵
Terminator
Multiple responses to a command can be cancelled with this command.
An FCS code and terminator are required.
End Codes
The ABORT command does not receive a response.
147
C-mode Command Details
End Codes
Section 4-3
There are no end codes with this command. (There is no response).
If the ABORT command (XZ) is received when data is being sent from a serial
port to a host, the send operation will be stopped even in the middle of a
frame.
4-3-38 INITIALIZE – – **
Initializes the transmission control procedure of the Units at all the unit numbers.
Command Format
*
@
Limitations
*
↵
Multiple responses to a command can be cancelled with this command.
The INITIALIZE command does not receive a response.
End Codes
There are no end codes with this command. (There is no response).
4-3-39 Undefined Command – – IC
This response is returned if the header code of a command cannot be
decoded.
Response Format
@ x 101 x 100
Unit No. (BCD)
Limitations
I
*
C
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
This response will be returned as an error for illegal header codes.
This response will be returned for error frames as well.
There is no command associated with IC.
End Codes
148
↵
There are no end codes with this command.
SECTION 5
FINS Commands
This section provides detailed descriptions of the FINS commands.
5-1
5-2
5-3
Command Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 FINS Command Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 End Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designating Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Designating I/O Memory (Variable) Area Addresses . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 About this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 MEMORY AREA READ: 01 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 MEMORY AREA WRITE: 01 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4 MEMORY AREA FILL: 01 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-5 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ: 01 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-6 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER: 01 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-7 PARAMETER AREA READ: 02 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-8 PARAMETER AREA WRITE: 02 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-9 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR: 02 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-10 PROGRAM AREA READ: 03 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-11 PROGRAM AREA WRITE: 03 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-12 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR: 03 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-13 RUN: 04 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-14 STOP: 04 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-15 CPU UNIT DATA READ: 05 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-16 CONNECTION DATA READ: 05 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-18 CYCLE TIME READ: 06 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-19 CLOCK READ: 07 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-20 CLOCK WRITE: 07 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-21 MESSAGE READ: 09 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-22 MESSAGE CLEAR: 09 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-23 FAL/FALS READ: 09 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-24 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE: 0C 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-25 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE: 0C 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-26 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE: 0C 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-27 ERROR CLEAR: 21 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-28 ERROR LOG READ: 21 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-29 ERROR LOG CLEAR: 21 03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-30 FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ: 21 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-31 FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG CLEAR: 21 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-32 FILE NAME READ: 22 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-33 SINGLE FILE READ: 22 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-34 SINGLE FILE WRITE: 22 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-35 FILE MEMORY FORMAT: 22 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-36 FILE DELETE: 22 05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-37 FILE COPY: 22 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-38 FILE NAME CHANGE: 22 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-39 MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-40 PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0B. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-41 PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-42 CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY: 22 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-43 MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER (CP-series CPU Units Only):
22 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-44 FORCED SET/RESET: 23 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-45 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL: 23 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-46 CONVERT TO COMPOWAY/F COMMAND: 28 03 . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-47 CONVERT TO MODBUS-RTU COMMAND: 28 04 . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-48 CONVERT TO MODBUS-ASCII COMMAND: 28 05 . . . . . . . . .
150
150
153
155
163
163
165
170
170
171
174
175
177
179
180
181
183
184
185
186
188
188
189
192
193
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
203
205
206
207
209
209
211
211
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
222
224
226
227
228
230
230
233
235
149
Command Lists
5-1
Section 5-1
Command Lists
5-1-1
FINS Commands
The following table lists the FINS commands.
Type
I/O memory area
access
Command
code
MR
SR
01
01
01
02
01
03
01
04
01
05
02
01
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
06
07
08
01
04
02
Machine configura- 05
tion reading
05
01
02
Status reading
06
06
01
20
Time data access
07
01
07
02
Message display
09
20
Access rights
0C
01
0C
02
0C
03
21
21
21
01
02
03
Parameter area
access
Program area
access
Operating mode
changes
Error log
150
Name
Function
MEMORY AREA READ
Reads the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
MEMORY AREA WRITE (See note.)
Writes the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
MEMORY AREA FILL (See note.)
Writes the same data to the specified
range of I/O memory area words.
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
Reads the contents of specified nonconsecutive I/O memory area words.
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER (See
Copies the contents of consecutive I/O
note.)
memory area words to another I/O
memory area.
PARAMETER AREA READ
Reads the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
PARAMETER AREA WRITE (See note.) Writes the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR)
Writes the same data to the specified
(See note.)
range of parameter area words.
PROGRAM AREA READ
Reads the UM (User Memory) area.
PROGRAM AREA WRITE (See note.)
Writes to the UM (User Memory) area.
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR (See note.) Clears the UM (User Memory) area.
RUN (See note.)
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR.
STOP (See note.)
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to PROGRAM.
CPU UNIT DATA READ
Reads CPU Unit data.
CONNECTION DATA READ
Reads the model numbers of the device
corresponding to addresses.
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
Reads the status of the CPU Unit.
CYCLE TIME READ
Reads the maximum, minimum, and
average cycle time.
CLOCK READ
Reads the present year, month, date,
minute, second, and day of the week.
CLOCK WRITE (See note.)
Changes the present year, month, date,
minute, second, or day of the week.
MESSAGE READ/CLEAR
Reads and clears messages, and reads
FAL/FALS messages.
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE (See note.) Acquires the access right as long as no
other device holds it.
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
Acquires the access right even if
another device already holds it.
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
Releases the access right that has been
acquired.
ERROR CLEAR (See note.)
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR (See note.)
Clears errors or error messages.
Reads the error log.
Clears the error log pointer.
Command Lists
Type
FINS write access
log
File memory
Debugging
Serial Gateway
functions
Section 5-1
Command
code
MR
SR
Name
21
40
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ
21
41
22
22
01
02
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG CLEAR
(See note.)
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
22
03
22
22
04
05
22
07
22
22
08
0A
22
0B
22
0C
22
15
22
20
23
01
23
02
28
03
28
04
28
05
Any
Any
Function
The CPU Unit automatically keeps a log
of any access for FINS write commands.
This command reads this log.
Clears the FINS write access log.
Reads file memory data.
Reads a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
SINGLE FILE WRITE (See note.)
Writes a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
FILE MEMORY FORMAT (See note.)
Formats (initializes) the file memory.
FILE DELETE (See note.)
Deletes specified files stored in the file
memory.
FILE COPY (See note.)
Copies files from one file memory to
another file memory in the same
system.
FILE NAME CHANGE (See note.)
Changes a file name.
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER
Transfers or compares data between the
(See note.)
I/O memory area and the file memory.
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the
(See note.)
parameter area and the file memory.
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER
Transfers or compares data between the
(See note.)
UM (User Memory) area and the file
memory.
DIRECTORY CREATE/DELETE (See
Creates or deletes a directory.
note.)
MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER
Transfers and verifies data between a
(CP1H CPU Units, CP1L CPU Units
Memory Cassette and the CPU Unit.
only)
FORCED SET/RESET (See note.)
Force-sets or force-resets bits, or
releases force-set status.
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL (See
Cancels all bits that have been force-set
note.)
or force-reset.
CONVERT TO COMPOWAY/F COMEncapsulates a CompoWay/F command
MAND
in a FINS command and sends it to a
serial port. (The CompoWay/F command is extracted and sent through the
serial port at the receiving end.)
CONVERT TO MODBUS-RTU COMEncapsulates a Modbus-RTU command
MAND
in a FINS command and sends it to a
serial port. (The Modbus-RTU command is extracted and sent through the
serial port at the receiving end.)
CONVERT TO MODBUS-ASCII COM- Encapsulates a Modbus-ASCII comMAND
mand in a FINS command and sends it
to a serial port. (The Modbus-ASCII
command is extracted and sent through
the serial port at the receiving end.)
CONVERT TO HOST LINK FINS COM- Sends any FINS command to a PLC
MAND (See note 2.)
connected to the serial port of a Serial
Communications Board or Unit (Ver. 1.2
or later only).
151
Command Lists
Section 5-1
Note
1. These commands will not be accepted and an end code of 2102 hex (cannot write due to protection) will be returned if the Write Protection from
FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks option is selected in the
PLC Setup for a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later, CPseries CPU Unit, or NSJ Controller.
2. The Serial Gateway function can be used with Host Link FINS commands
only under the following conditions.
For more details, refer to 3-5 FINS Commands with Host Link Protocol and
the CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual (W336-E1-05).
Connecting to the Destination PLC
Connect the destination PLC to the serial port of a Serial Communications
Unit or Board (Ver. 1.2 or later) as a Host Link Slave and use the serial
gateway mode or protocol macro mode communications.
Specifying the Destination PLC's FINS Address
• Destination Network Address (DNA):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, the routing table associates this network address with
the Serial Communications Unit or Board's serial port.
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the unit address of the Serial Communications Unit or Board's serial port.
• Destination Node Address (DA1):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, the node address is the Host Link unit number + 1 (values 1 to 32).
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, the node address is still the Host Link unit number
+ 1 (values 1 to 32).
• Destination Unit Address (DA2):
Specifies any unit address other than the serial port. (The destination of a
FINS message must be an address other than the Serial Communications
Unit or Board's serial port.)
152
Command Lists
5-1-2
Type
Section 5-1
FINS Command Restrictions
Command
code
MR SR
I/O memory 01
area access
01
02
03
04
05
Parameter
02
area access
01
02
03
Program
03
area access
06
07
08
Operating
04
mode
changes
05
Machine
configuration
reading
Status
reading
06
Time data
access
07
Message
display
09
01
02
01
02
01
20
01
02
20
Name
RUN
mode
MONITOR
mode
PROGRAM
mode
PLC status
Access Read
right
protection
MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
MULTIPLE MEMORY
AREA READ
MEMORY AREA
TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA
READ
PARAMETER AREA
WRITE
PARAMETER AREA
CLEAR
PROGRAM AREA
READ
PROGRAM AREA
WRITE
PROGRAM AREA
CLEAR
RUN
STOP
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
DIP
switch
UM
writeprotection
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
Disabled Disabled
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
Disabled Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
CPU UNIT DATA READ
CONNECTION DATA
READ
CPU UNIT STATUS
READ
CYCLE TIME READ
CLOCK READ
CLOCK WRITE
MESSAGE READ/
CLEAR
Disabled OK
Writeprotected
from
network
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
Disabled Disabled OK
Disabled OK
Disabled Disabled
Disabled Disabled OK
Disabled OK
Disabled Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
Disabled OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
(MESSAGE
CLEAR
only)
Access rights 0C
01
02
03
Error log
21
01
02
03
ACCESS RIGHT
ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT
FORCED ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT
RELEASE
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
OK
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
OK
Disabled
153
Command Lists
Type
FINS write
access log
Section 5-1
Command
code
MR SR
21
40
21
41
File memory 22
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
0A
0B
0C
Debugging
Name
RUN
mode
FINS WRITE ACCESS
LOG READ
FINS WRITE ACCESS
LOG CLEAR
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
SINGLE FILE WRITE
FILE MEMORY
FORMAT
FILE DELETE
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
MEMORY AREA–FILE
TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA–
FILE TRANSFER
PROGRAM AREA–FILE
TRANSFER
MONITOR
mode
PROGRAM
mode
PLC status
Access Read
right
protection
DIP
Writeswitch
proUM
tected
writefrom
protec- network
tion
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled OK
OK
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
OK (note
1)
OK (note
2)
OK (note OK
1)
OK (note OK
2)
OK
Disabled OK
Disabled OK
OK (note Disabled
1)
Disabled
Disabled
(note 3)
OK
Disabled
15
CREATE/DELETE
DIRECTORY
OK
OK
Disabled OK
20
MEMORY CASSETTE
TRANSFER (CP1H
CPU Units, CP1L CPU
Units only)
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET
CANCEL
CONVERT TO COMPOWAY/F COMMAND
CONVERT TO MODBUS-RTU COMMAND
CONVERT TO MODBUS-ASCII COMMAND
CONVERT TO HOST
LINK FINS COMMAND
Disabled Disabled OK
Disabled OK
OK (note Disabled
4)
Disabled OK
Disabled OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Disabled
Disabled
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
23
01
02
Serial Gate- 28
way
28
03
04
28
05
Any
Any
Note
Depends on the command code used.
1. File-to-memory area transfers are not possible
2. File-to-program area transfers are not possible
3. Program area-to-file transfers are possible
4. Memory Cassette contents cannot be transferred to the program area if
program area data is included.
5. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, CP-series CPU
Unit, NSJ Controller, an option is available in the PLC Setup (Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks) to not received FINS write commands from specified network nodes even if a FINS
write command is sent to the CPU Unit. The FINS write commands are the
ones listed as Disabled in the Write-protected from network column above.
The enables creating a system in which write/control operations are possi-
154
Command Lists
Section 5-1
ble only from specific nodes. For details, refer to 1-4-4 Write Protection
from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks in the CS Series
PLC Operation Manual or the CJ Series PLC Operation Manual.
5-1-3
End Codes
The following table lists the main codes and the sub-codes, which combine to
form the end code (response code) returned for a FINS command. The probable cause and corrections for each error code are also given.
Depending on the command, the destination code will sometimes make a
request of another node on a network. The other node is referred to as the
third node.
Note In addition to the end codes listed in the following table, the specific flags in
the end code word (bits 6, 7, and 15) may also be ON. If bit 15 is ON, an error
has occurred during a network relay operation. If bit 6 or 7 is ON, an error has
occurred in the destination CPU Unit. If this occurs, refer to the operation
manuals for the CPU Unit where the error occurred and remove the cause of
the error. The contents of the end code word are shown in the following diagram.
15
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Main code (MRES)
1: Fatal CPU Unit error
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sub-code (SRES)
1: Non-fatal CPU Unit error
1: Network relay error (See following section for details)
Main code
00: Normal
completion
01: Local node
error
Sub-code
00: Normal
completion
01: Service
canceled
01: Local node
not in network
02: Token
timeout
03: Retries
failed
Check point
---
---
---
---
Service was canceled.
Data link status
Network status
of local node
Maximum node
address
---
Service was canceled.
Local node is not participating in the network.
Token does not arrive.
Check the capacity of the destination area in the third node.
Check the status of the data link.
Connect the node to the network.
04: Too many
send frames
Number of
enabled send
frames
05: Node
address range
error
Node address
06: Node
address
duplication
Node addresses
Probable cause
Correction
Set the local node to within the
maximum node address.
Send was not possible during Execute a communications test
the specified number of
between the nodes and re-examine
retries.
the system environment if it fails.
Cannot send because maxi- Check event execution on the netmum number of event frames work and reduce the number of
events per cycle.
exceeded.
Increase the maximum number of
event frames.
Node address setting error
Check the settings of the rotary
occurred.
switches to be sure that the address
is within range and that each
address is set only once in the
same network.
The same node address has Change the address of one of the
been set twice in the same
nodes with the same address.
network.
155
Command Lists
Main code
02: Destination
node error
Section 5-1
Sub-code
Check point
01: Destination
node not in network
02: Unit missing
03: Third node
missing
INS indicator on
Unit
The destination node is not in Add the destination node to the netthe network.
work.
Instruction
control data
Instruction
control data
There is no Unit with the
Check the destination unit address.
specified unit address.
The third node does not exist. Check the unit address of the third
node. Check the node address of
the third node in the send data for
CMND(490).
Broadcasting was specified. Specify only one node for the third
node.
The destination node is busy. Increase the number of retries or
review the system so that the
destination node does not receive
so many messages.
The message was destroyed Increase the number of retries or
by noise.
test communications between
nodes to see if there is too much
noise.
The response monitor time is Increase the length of the response
too short.
monitor time.
The send/receive frame was Take appropriate measures based
discarded.
on the error history.
An error occurred in the
Take appropriate measures based
communications controller.
on the operation manuals for the
related Units/Boards.
A CPU error occurred in the Clear the error from the CPU Unit
destination CPU Unit.
based on its operation manuals.
Command data
04: Destination --node busy
05: Response
timeout
---
Instruction
control data
Error history
03: Controller
error
04: Service
unsupported
05: Routing
table error
156
01: Communications controller error
02: CPU Unit
error
Unit/Board
indicators
Probable cause
Correction
CPU Unit
indicators at
destination node
03: Controller
Board indicators A response was not returned Check network communications
error
because an error occurred in status and restart the Board. If the
the Board.
problem persists, replace the
Board.
04: Unit
Unit number
The unit number was set
Set the rotary switches correctly,
number error
incorrectly.
being sure the unit numbers are
within range and that each number
is used only once.
01: Undefined Command code The Unit/Board does not sup- Check the command code.
command
port the specified command
code.
02: Not
Unit model and
The command cannot be
Check the model number and
supported by
version
executed because the model version.
model/version
or version is incorrect.
Register the destination network
The destination network or
01: Destination Routing table
node address is not set in the and node in the routing tables.
address
routing tables.
setting error
02: No routing Routing table
Relaying is not possible
Set routing tables in the source
tables
because there are no routing node, designation node, and relay
tables.
nodes.
03: Routing
Routing table
There is an error in the
Set the routing tables correctly.
table error
routing tables.
04: Too many
Network
An attempt was made to
Reconstruct the networks or
relays
configuration
send to a network that was
change the routing tables so that
commands are sent within a range
over 3 networks away
of 3 networks or less.
Command Lists
Main code
10: Command
format error
11: Parameter
error
Section 5-1
Sub-code
01: Command
too long
Check point
Probable cause
Command data
The command is longer than
the maximum permissible
length.
02: Command Command data The command is shorter than
too short
the minimum permissible
length.
03: Elements/ Command data The designated number of
elements differs from the
data don’t
number of write data items.
match
04: Command Command data An incorrect format was
format error
used.
05: Header
Routing table
Either the relay table in the
error
local node or the local network table in the relay node is
incorrect.
The specified word does not
01: Area classi- Memory area
exist in the memory area or
fication missing code in
there is no EM Area.
command data
02: Access size Access size
The access size specificaerror
specification in
tion is incorrect or an odd
command data
word address is specified.
03: Address
Starting address The start address in comrange error
in command data mand process is beyond the
accessible area.
Starting address The end address in com04: Address
and number of
mand process is beyond the
range
elements in
accessible area.
exceeded
command data
Data link tables
06: Program
missing
Program
number in
command data
09: Relational
error
Command data
Data link table
0A: Duplicate
data access
I/O access in
CPU Unit
Data link tables
0B: Response
too long
0C: Parameter
error
Number of elements in command data
Parameters in
command data
Data link table
file
Correction
Check the command format and
correct the command data.
Check the command format and
correct the command data.
Check the number of elements and
set data for each element.
Check the command format and
correct the command data.
Set the routing tables correctly.
Check the memory areas and
parameter codes in the command
and correct the command data.
Check the memory areas and
access size and correct the access
size.
Check the area being processed
and set the correct range.
Check the area being processed
and set the correct range.
The total number of words is
beyond the limit.
FFFF hex was not specified.
Correct the data link tables.
A large–small relationship in
the elements in the command
data is incorrect.
A node not set in the
common link parameters is
set as a refresh parameter.
Differential monitoring was
specified during data tracing
or data tracing was specified
during differential monitoring.
Check the command data and
correct the relationship between the
elements.
Correct the data link tables.
The same node address is
specified more than once.
The response format is
longer than the maximum
permissible length.
There is an error in one of the
parameter settings.
There is an error in the file.
Correct the data link tables.
Specify FFFF hex.
Abort the current process or wait
until it ends before executing the
command.
Check the command format and
correct the number of elements.
Check the command data and
correct the parameters.
Check the contents of the file.
157
Command Lists
Main code
20: Read not
possible
Sub-code
02: Protected
Section 5-1
Check point
---
03: Table miss- Table
ing
04: Data
missing
05: Program
missing
21: Write not
possible
---
Program number in command
data
06: File missing File name and
file device
07: Data
Contents of
mismatch
memory being
compared
--01: Read-only ---
02: Protected
Cannot write
data link table
03: Cannot
register
A table has not been registered.
There is an error in the table.
The search data does not
exist.
A non-existing program
number has been specified.
Check the contents of the file.
If the area is protected using a
switch setting, release protection
and then execute the command. If
the area is permanently read-only,
the command cannot be executed.
Release protection from a
Programming Device and then
execute the command.
Change the PLC Setup so that the
data link tables can be manually
written.
Writing is not possible
because automatic data link
table generation has been
specified.
The file cannot be created
because the limit has been
exceeded.
The maximum number of
files has already been
opened for the system limit.
A non-existing program
number has been specified.
Program
number in
command data
06: File missing File name
Check the program numbers and
specify a valid one.
A file read operation failed.
The specified area is
read-only.
PLC Setup
05: Program
missing
Correct the table.
---
Check the path and file name, and
correct them.
Check memory contents and use
the correct data.
The program area is
protected.
Number of files
in file device
Correction
Release protection from a Programming Device and then execute the
command.
Register a table.
The file does not exist at the
specified file device.
A data being compared is not
the same.
---
Number of files
open
158
Probable cause
The program area is protected.
Delete any unnecessary files or
create more file memory.
Close one or more files and then
execute the command.
Check the program numbers and
specify a valid one.
07: File name
already exists
File name
The file does not exist at the
specified file device.
A file with the same name
already exists in the specified
file device.
Correct the file name and then
execute the command.
Change the name of the file being
written and then execute the
command.
08: Cannot
change
Contents of
memory being
changed
The change cannot be made --because doing so would
create a problem.
Command Lists
Main code
22: Not executable in current
mode
23: No such
device
24: Cannot
start/stop
Section 5-1
Sub-code
01: Not possible during
execution
02: Not
possible while
running
03: Wrong PLC
mode
04: Wrong PLC
mode
05: Wrong PLC
mode
06: Wrong PLC
mode
07: Specified
node not
polling node
08: Step
cannot be executed
01: File device
missing
02: Memory
missing
03: Clock
missing
01: Table
missing
Check point
Probable cause
Correction
--Data link status
The mode is incorrect.
The data link is operating.
Check the mode.
Check the status of the data links.
--Data link status
The mode is incorrect.
The data links are active.
Check the mode.
Check the status of the data links.
---
The PLC is in PROGRAM
Check the modes of the PLC and
mode.
computer.
The PLC is in DEBUG mode. Check the modes of the PLC and
computer.
The PLC is in MONITOR
Check the modes of the PLC and
mode.
computer.
The PLC is in RUN mode.
Check the modes of the PLC and
computer.
The specified node is not the Check node functioning as the
polling node.
polling node for the network.
---------
---
The mode is incorrect.
Check step status.
Unit
configuration
---
The specified memory does
not exist as a file device.
There is no file memory.
---
There is no clock.
Mount memory or format EM as file
memory.
Check the file memory to see if it is
mounted.
Check the model.
Data link tables
The data link tables have not Set the data link tables.
been registered or they
contain an error.
159
Command Lists
Main code
25: Unit error
Section 5-1
Sub-code
02: Memory
error
03: I/O setting
error
04: Too many
I/O points
05: CPU bus
error
06: I/O
duplication
07: I/O bus
error
160
Check point
Contents of
memory being
processed
I/O Unit
configuration
Probable cause
The contents of memory
contains an error.
The registered I/O tables do
not agree with the actual I/O
configuration.
Number of I/O in There are too many I/O
points and remote I/O points
registered I/O
registered.
tables
CPU bus line
An error occurred in data
transfer between the CPU
and a CPU Bus Unit.
Rack numbers,
Unit numbers,
and I/O
addresses in
PLC Setup
I/O bus line
The same number/address
was set more than once.
An error occurred in data
transfer between the CPU
and an I/O Unit.
Correction
Transfer the correct contents to
memory.
Correct the I/O tables or the I/O
configuration.
Change the registered I/O table so
that it is within the limit.
Check Units, Boards, and cables to
be sure they are connected correctly and then execute the ERROR
CLEAR command.
Check the PLC Setup and correct
the numbers/addresses so that
each is used only once.
Check Units, Boards, and cables to
be sure they are connected correctly and then execute the ERROR
CLEAR command.
Check Units, Boards, and cables to
be sure they are connected correctly and then execute the ERROR
CLEAR command.
Check Units, Boards, and cables to
be sure they are connected correctly and then execute the ERROR
CLEAR command.
Check the I/O tables and correct the
allocations.
09: SYSMAC
BUS/2 error
SYSMAC BUS/2 An error occurred in data
transfer on the SYSMAC
transmission
BUS/2 line.
path
0A: CPU Bus
Unit error
CPU Bus Unit
transmission
path
An error occurred in data
transfer for a CPU Bus Unit.
0D: SYSMAC
BUS No.
duplication
0F: Memory
error
Word settings
The same word is allocated
more than once.
Status of memory being
processed
10: SYSMAC
BUS terminator missing
---
A memory error has occurred For internal memory, write the corin internal memory, a memrect data and then execute the comory card, or EM file memory. mand.
For a memory card or EM file memory, the file data has been
destroyed. Execute the FILE MEMORY FORMAT command.
If the problem persists, replace the
memory.
Terminators have not been
Set the terminators correctly.
set.
Command Lists
Main code
26: Command
error
Section 5-1
Sub-code
Check point
Probable cause
01: No protection
Command
protection for
program area
The specified area is not
protected.
02: Incorrect
password
04: Protected
---
An incorrect password has
been specified.
The specified area is
protected.
09: Necessary
items not set
Command data
---
Correction
An attempt was made to clear
protection on an area that is not
protected, i.e., there is no reason to
clear protection.
Specify the correct password.
Clear protection from a
Programming Device and then
execute the command.
Number of com- The node receiving the
Wait for current processing to end
mands being
command is already process- or force the end of a current
ing 5 commands.
process and then execute the
executed
command.
--The service is being
05: Service
Wait for the service to end or force
already
executed.
the end of the service and then exeexecuting
cute the command.
06: Service
--The service is not being
If necessary, start the service.
stopped
executed.
07: No
LNK indicator on The right to execute the
The local node is not in the data
execution right Unit/Board
service has not been
link. Execute the command from a
obtained.
node that is participating in the data
link.
--A response was not returned Restart the Board. If the problem
because a buffer error
persists, replace the Board.
occurred.
08: Settings not Settings required The settings required before Make the required settings.
complete
before execution executing the service have
not been made.
0A: Number
Action numbers
already defined and transition
numbers of program in program
area
0B: Error will
Cause of error
not clear
being cleared
30: Access right 01: No access --error
right
40: Abort
01: Service
aborted
---
The required elements have
not been set in the command
data.
The specified action/ transition number has already
been registered in a
previous program.
Check the command format and set
the required elements in the
command data.
Check the action/transition numbers
to ones that are not being used and
then execute the command.
The cause of the error has
not been removed.
The access right is held by
another device. (Online editing is being executed from
another node or ACCESS
RIGHT ACQUIRE or
ACCESS RIGHT FORCE
ACQUIRE has been
executed by another node.)
Remove the cause of the error and
then execute ERROR CLEAR.
Service was aborted with
ABORT command.
Wait until the access right is
released and then execute the
command.
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE or
ACCESS RIGHT FORCE
ACQUIRE can be executed to
obtain the access right, but this may
adversely affect processing by the
node that previously held the
access right.
---
In addition to the above end codes, there are also specific flags in the end
code word (bits 6, 7, and 15) that may also be ON. If bit 6 or 7 is ON, an error
has occurred in the destination CPU Unit. If bit 15 is ON, an error has
occurred during a network relay operation. The contents of the end code word
are shown in the following diagram.
161
Command Lists
Section 5-1
15
14
1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Main code (MRES)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sub-code (SRES)
1: Fatal CPU Unit error
1: Non-fatal CPU Unit error
1: Network relay error (See following section for details)
Handling Fatal and Non-fatal CPU Errors
If bit 6 or 7 is ON, an error has occurred in the destination CPU Unit. If this
occurs, refer to the operation manuals for the CPU Unit where the error
occurred and remove the cause of the error.
Example of a CPU Unit Error
For example, if a battery error occurs in the destination CPU Unit, bit 6 in the
end code will be ON, because a battery error is a non-fatal CPU Unit error.
Basically, the end code of a sent command that is completed normally is
0040.
Handling Network Relay Errors
If bit 15 is ON, an error has occurred during a network relay operation. The
end code has an additional two-byte (one word) network relay error code,
which can be used to determine the location of the relay error. The following
diagram shows the response data when a network relay error occurs when
CMND(490) is used.
Bit
D (First Response Word)
Command code
Bit
D+1
Main code
1: Fatal CPU Unit error
Sub-code
1: Non-fatal CPU Unit error
1: Network relay error
Bit
D+2
Error network address
Error node address
Error network address: 00 to 7F (0 to 127)
Error Node Address
Ethernet:
01 to 7E (1 to 128)
SYSMAC NET: 01 to 7E (1 to 126)
Controller Link: 01 to 20 (1 to 32)
SYSMAC LINK: 01 to 3E (1 to 62)
Use this information to determine the node where the error occurred and take
appropriate measures.
Note When Using SEND(090) and RECV(098)
Check the path the command took using the routing tables. Check the end
code and take appropriate measures for the relay node where the error
occurred.
162
Designating Command Parameters
5-2
5-2-1
Section 5-2
Designating Command Parameters
Designating I/O Memory (Variable) Area Addresses
When reading from and writing to the I/O memory (variable) area, designate I/
O memory area addresses as described below.
I/O memory designation involves the designation of the memory area code
and the address within the memory area code.
• Memory area codes are designated in one byte (two digits hexadecimal),
as shown in the table in 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations.
• Addresses within memory area codes consist of a total of three bytes (six
digits hexadecimal). Of these, two bytes (four digits hexadecimal) designate the word and one byte (two digits hexadecimal) designates the bit.
I/O memory address
designation
Memory area code
4 bytes (8 digits hexa- ⇒
decimal)
Memory area code +
word + bit, in order
1 byte (2 digits hex)
Address within I/O memory area
designation
Word
Bit
2 bytes (4 digits hex) 1 byte (2 digits hex)
Set by classification
(CIO, WR, etc.).
Note: Also possible
with forced status.
From 0000 hex
(Upper limit depends
on memory area
code.)
Example
Bit 13 of CIO 0010:
30000A0D hex
Example
CIO: 30 hex
Example
0010: 000A in hexadecimal
00 to 0F hex
Note: Always 00 hex
for word address and
Timer/Counter Completion Flags.
Example
Bit 13: 0D in hexadecimal
Example: I/O memory reading
Bit 13 of CIO 0010, i.e., CIO 001013, is read.
Read address
I/O memory area designation (Area: CIO, Data type: Bit)
Command code
Example: Reading W005
01
01
B1
0D
05
00
Read address
I/O memory designation (Area: WR, Data type: Word)
Command code
Element Data
Configurations
Bit Designations
When bits are designated, each bit is considered a single element. The data
for the element is expressed in one byte (ON: 01 hex; OFF: 00 hex). When
data is written, this byte is transmitted. When data is read, this byte is
returned.
00 Hex: OFF
01 Hex: ON
163
Designating Command Parameters
Section 5-2
Bit Data with Forced Status
When bits are designated, each bit is considered as one element.
The data for each element is expressed in one byte (8 bits). Bit 00 indicates
the specified bit data, and bit 01 indicates the forced status, When reading,
this one byte is returned.
Bit 00
0: OFF
1: ON
Bit 01
0: No forced status
1: Forced status
Word Designations
When words are designated, each word is considered a single element. The
data for the element is expressed in two bytes. Bits 0 to 15 correspond to bits
0 to 15 of each word. When data is written, these two bytes are transmitted for
each word. When data is read, these two bytes are returned.
Bits 0 to 7
Bits 8 to 15
Word Data With Forced Status Data, Present Value (4 Bytes)
Word data, PV bits 0 to 7 (4th byte)
Word data, PV bits 8 to 15 (3rd byte)
Word data, PV bits 0 to 7 forced status (2nd byte)
Word data, PV bits 8 to 15 forced status (1st byte)
0: Not forced
1: Forced
Current EM Bank Number (2 Bytes)
Bits 0 to 7 (2nd byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (1st byte)
164
Bit 15
0: EM not used or all
banks converted to
file memory.
1: EM used.
Bits 0 to 14:
Current bank number
Designating Command Parameters
5-2-2
Section 5-2
I/O Memory Address Designations
Area
CIO
Area
CIO
Work
Area
Holding
Bit Area
Auxiliary
Bit Area
WR
Data type
Bit
HR
AR
Bit with
forced status
CS/CJ mode
Memory Memory area
area
address
code
(hex)
30
CIO 000000
to
CIO 614315
31
W00000 to
W51115
32
H00000 to
H51115
33
A00000 to
A44715 (read
only)
A44800 to
A95915 (read/
write)
70
CIO 000000
to
CIO 614315
71
W00000 to
W51115
72
H00000 to
H51115
B0
CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143
CIO
Area
CIO
Work
Area
Holding
Bit Area
CIO
Area
WR
Work
Area
Holding
Bit Area
Auxiliary
Bit Area
WR
B1
HR
B2
AR
B3
CIO
Area
CIO
Work
Area
Holding
Bit Area
Timer
Area
WR
F1
HR
F2
TIM
Completion 09
Flag
Counter
Area
CNT
HR
CIO
Word
Word with
forced status
F0
Memory
address
000000 to
17FF0F
000000 to
01FF0F
000000 to
01FF0F
000000 to
01BF0F
CV mode
Length
Memory Memory area Memory per element
area
address
address
code
(hex)
00
CIO 000000
000000 to 1
to
09FB0F
CIO 255515
---------
---
---
00
0B0000 to
0CBF0F
000000 to
17FF0F
40
000000 to
01FF0F
000000 to
01FF0F
000000 to
17FF00
---
A00000 to
A44715 (read
only)
A44800 to
A95915 (read/
write)
CIO 000000
to
CIO 255515
---
---
---
---
80
000000 to 2
09FB00
---
01C000 to
03BF0F
0CC000 to
0EBF0F
000000 to 1
09FB0F
---
W000 to
000000 to
W511
01FF00
H000 to H511 000000 to
01FF00
A000 to A447 000000 to
(read only)
01BF00
A448 to A959 01C000 to
(read/write)
03BF00
CIO 0000 to
000000 to
CIO 6143
17FF00
---
CIO 0000 to
CIO 2555
---
---
---
---
80
0B0000 to
0CBF00
0CC000 to
0EBF00
000000 to 4
09FB00
W000 to
000000 to
W511
01FF00
H000 to H511 000000 to
01FF00
T0000 to
000000 to
T4095
0FFF00
---
A000 to A447
(read only)
A448 to A959
(read/write)
CIO 000000
to
CIO 255515
---
---
---
---
01
000000 to 1
T0000 to
T2047 (T0000 07FF00
(000000 to
to T1023)
03FF00)
C0000 to
C4095
800000 to
8FFF00
C0
C0000 to
C2047
(C0000 to
C1023)
---
080000 to
0FFF00
(080000 to
0BFF00)
165
Designating Command Parameters
Area
Timer
Area
TIM
Counter
Area
CNT
Timer
Area
TIM
Counter
Area
CNT
DM Area DM
DM
Data type
02
Word
82
EM
bank
10 to
bank
18
EM
Word
bank 0
to bank
F
EM
bank
10 to
bank
18
166
89
Bit
EM Area EM
Bit
bank 0
to bank
F
Task
Flag
CS/CJ mode
Memory Memory area
area
address
code
(hex)
Completion 49
Flag with
forced status
PV
Section 5-2
20 to 2F
Memory
address
T0000 to
T4095
000000 to
0FFF00
C0000 to
C4095
800000 to
8FFF00
T0000 to
T4095
000000 to
0FFF00
C0000 to
C4095
800000 to
8FFF00
D0000000 to
D3276715
D00000 to
D32767
E0_0000000
to 3276715
to
EF_0000000
to 3276715
000000 to
7FFF0F
000000 to
7FFF00
000000 to
7FFF0F
E0 to E8 E10_0000000
to 3276715
to
E18_0000000
0 to 3276715
A0 to AF E0_00000 to
32767
or
50 to 5F to
EF_00000 to
(See
32767
note 2)
CV mode
Memory Memory area
area
address
code
(hex)
41
81
--82
Memory
address
Length
per element
T0000 to
000000 to 1
T2047 (T0000 07FF00
to T1023)
(000000 to
03FF00)
C0000 to
080000 to
C2047
0FFF00
(C0000 to
(080000 to
C1023)
0BFF00)
T0000 to
000000 to 2
T2047 (T0000 07FF00
(000000 to
to T1023)
03FF00)
C0000 to
080000 to
C2047
0FFF00
(C0000 to
(080000 to
C1023)
0BFF00)
----1
---
D00000 to
D32767
---
000000 to 2
7FFF00
--1
000000 to
7FFF0F
---
---
---
000000 to
7FFF00
90 to 97
E0_00000 to
32767
to
E7_00000 to
32767
000000 to 2
7FFF00
1
60 to 68
E10_00000 to
32767
to
E18_00000 to
32767
000000 to
7FFF00
---
---
---
2
E0000000 to
E3276715
E00000 to
E32767
---
000000 to
7FFF0F
000000 to
7FFF00
0F0000
---
---
---
1
98
9C
E000000 to
E32767
---
000000 to 2
7FFF00
000600
2
TK0000 to
TK0031
TK0000 to
TK0031
000000 to
001F00
000000 to
001F00
---
---
---
1
---
---
---
1
EM
current
bank
Bit
0A
Word
98
EM
current
bank
No.
TK
Bank No.
BC
Bit
06
TK
Status
46
Designating Command Parameters
Area
Index
IR
Register
Data
DR
Register
Clock Pulses
Condition Flags
Data type
Section 5-2
CS/CJ mode
Memory Memory area
area
address
code
(hex)
PV
DC
IR00 to IR15
PV
BC
Bit
07
DR00 to
DR15
1-min clock
pulse
1-s clock
pulse
0.2-s clock
pulse
0.1-s clock
pulse
0.02-s clock
pulse
Error Flag
(ER)
Carry Flag
(CY)
Greater Than
Flag (>)
Equals Flag
(=)
Less Than
Flag (<)
Negative Flag
(N)
Overflow Flag
(OF)
Underflow
Flag (UF)
Greater Than
or Equals
Flag (>=)
Not Equal
Flag (<>)
Less Than or
Equals Flag
(<=)
Always OFF
Flag (ON)
Always ON
Flag (OFF)
Access Error
Flag
Bit
Note
Memory
address
010000 to
010F00
020000 to
020F00
000000
CV mode
Memory Memory area
area
address
code
(hex)
Memory
address
Length
per element
---
---
---
4
9C
DR0 to DR2
---
---
000300 to 2
000500
--1
---
---
1
---
---
1
000100
000200
000300
000400
100000
100100
100200
100300
100400
100500
100600
100700
100800
100900
100A00
100E00
100F00
200100
1. The only current EM bank that can be read with FINS commands is the
current EM bank that is set at the end of the cycle.
2. On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area
code of EM banks 0 to F.
167
Designating Command Parameters
Section 5-2
Examples
Example
Designation
B0000A00 hex
30000A0D hex
B0 hex
30 hex
Contents
Address within memory
area code
Word
Bit
000A hex
00 hex
000A hex
0D hex
B10000A00 hex
31000A0D hex
B1 hex
31 hex
000A hex
000A hex
00 hex
0D hex
B2000A00 hex
32000A0D hex
B2 hex
32 hex
000A hex
000A hex
00 hex
0D hex
70000A0D hex
70 hex
000A hex
0D hex
F0000A00 hex
F0 hex
000A hex
00 hex
09000A00 hex
09 hex
000A hex
00 hex
82000A00 hex
A3000A00 hex
98000A00 hex
82 hex
A3 hex
98 hex
000A hex
000A hex
000A hex
00 hex
00 hex
00 hex
Memory area
code
CIO 0010
CIO 001013
(bit 13 of CIO 0010)
W010
W01013
(bit 13 of W010)
H010
H01013
(bit 13 of H010)
CIO 001013 (bit 13 of
CIO 0010), with
forced status
CIO 0010, with forced
status
T0010 Completion
Flag
D00010 value
E_3_00010 value
Current EM bank
00010 value
Number of Elements for
I/O MEMORY AREA READ
(0101) and I/O MEMORY
AREA WRITE (0102)
The maximum number of elements that can be specified for reading or writing
with I/O MEMORY AREA READ (0101) and I/O MEMORY AREA WRITE
(0102) depends on the network that must be passed through.
Network
SYSWAY
Ethernet
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
DeviceNet
Max. number of read
elements
269 words
999 words
999 words
269 words
269 words
Max. number of write
elements
267 words
996 words
996 words
267 words
267 words
If more than one network is passed through to read or write data, the value for
the network with the smallest limit will apply.
Volume Labels and File
Names
Volume labels are names registered in file memory. File names consist of 12
bytes, as shown below. Be sure to follow this configuration when designating
a file name by means of command parameters.
8 bytes
Volume label/file name (directory name)
1 byte
2E Hex
3 bytes
Extension
Delimiter
Start the file name and extension in the most-significant bytes respectively
and then fill in any unused bytes with 20 hex.
If the file name or extension in response data is less than 8 or 3 bytes respectively, unused bytes will be filled with 20 hex.
It is not permissible to specify 00 (hex) or E5 (hex) at the beginning of a file
name. (Codes of 00 hex or E5 hex means “erased” in DOS.) It is also not per-
168
Designating Command Parameters
Section 5-2
missible to specify 7E hex (–) at the first and second characters (consecutive)
of a file name.
If a file name has no extension, fill both the period (2E hex) and the extension
with 20 hex.
If the file name in response data has no extension, both the period (2E hex)
and the extension will be filled with 20 hex.
169
FINS Commands
5-3
5-3-1
Section 5-3
FINS Commands
About this Section
This section describes the command and response formats for FINS commands. For each format, the data is arranged in order from left to right.
Command and Response Formats
Using CMND(490)
When CMND(490) is used to send a FINS command, the command is stored
in I/O memory from the rightmost word to the leftmost word, with a single word
represented as two boxes (four digits hexadecimal) in the format diagram.
In the following example, five words of data are written from D00010.
Command Format
01
02
Command code
82
00
0A
00
00
05
Beginning write address Number of
Variable classification
elements to
write
Write data
The command format data is stored in the order shown below when
CMND(490) is used.
01
02
Command code
82
00
Variable classification, beginning write address
0A
00
Beginning write address
00
05
Number of elements to write
Write data
Write data
Response Format
Command End code
code
The response format data is stored in the order shown below when
CMND(490) is used.
Command code
End code
170
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Using Host Link
Communications
When a FINS command is sent using Host Link communications, the Host
Link header, response wait time, destination node address, and source node
address are all placed before the command format, and the frame check
sequence (FCS) and terminator are placed after the command format before
sending the command from the host computer.
Execution Conditions
The Execution Conditions tables given for each command tell whether the
CPU Unit can or cannot receive commands when it is in RUN, MONITOR, or
PROGRAM mode, when another device has the access right, when command
protection is in effect, and when the DIP switch is protected.
Access Right at Other
Device
The Access right at other device column tells whether the CPU Unit can or
cannot receive a command when another device has the access right to the
CPU Unit.
Note The access right is the exclusive right of access to a particular device (the
CPU Unit in this case) which prevents interruption by another device (i.e.,
another Peripheral Device or Unit) when multiple commands are executed.
When another device has the access right, the local device cannot execute
commands marked by a “No” in the “Access right at other device” column.
Conversely, other devices cannot execute this command when the local
device has the access right.
UM Read Protection
The UM read protection column tells whether the CPU Unit can or cannot receive
the command when UM (user memory) is protected from a Peripheral Device.
DIP Switch UM write
Protection
The DIP switch UM protection column tells whether the CPU Unit can or cannot receive a command when UM is write-protected by turning ON pin 1 of the
DIP switch on the CPU Unit’s front panel.
Network Write Protection
The Validate FINS Write Protection via Network parameter in the PLC Setup
can be used to set whether the CPU Unit will accept or reject network commands.
5-3-2
MEMORY AREA READ: 01 01
Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive memory area
words starting from the specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
01
01
Command
Beginning address No. of items
code
(binary)
I/O Memory area code
Response Format
01
01
Command
code
End code
Data (for number of items)
171
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Parameters
I/O memory area code, beginning address, number of items (command)
Specify the type of data read, the beginning address of the data to be read,
and the number of items of data to be read (2 digits hexadecimal).
The memory areas that can be read are given in the following table (I/O Memory Area Codes). Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for the
specific addresses that can be used.
Data (response)
Indicates the data from the specified I/O memory area is returned in
sequence starting from the beginning address. The required number of bytes
in total is calculated as follows:
Number of bytes required by each item x number of items
For details regarding data configuration, refer to Element Data Configurations
on page 163.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Note
1. If the specified number of elements is 0000 hex, nothing will be read and
a normal response will be returned.
2. I/O memory can be read regardless of the operating mode of the CPU Unit.
172
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
I/O Memory Area Codes
Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
EM Area
Data type
CIO
WR
HR
AR
CIO
WR
HR
AR
TIM
CNT
TIM
CNT
DM
DM
EM bank 0 to
bank F
EM bank 10
to bank 18
EM bank 0 to
bank F
EM bank 10
to bank 18
EM current
bank
Task Flag
Index Register
Data Register
Clock Pulses
Condition Flags
Note
EM current
bank No.
TK
TK
IR
DR
Completion Flag
CS/CJ mode
memory area
code (hex)
30
31
32
33
B0
B1
B2
B3
09
CV mode
Bytes per
memory area
element
code (hex)
00
1
----00
80
2
----80
01
1
PV
89
81
2
Bit
Word
Bit
02
82
20 to 2F
--82
---
1
2
1
E0 to E8
---
1
A0 to AF or
50 to 5F
(see note.)
60 to 68
90 to 97
2
---
2
Bit
Word
Bank No.
0A
98
BC
--98
9C
1
2
2
Bit
Status
PV
PV
Bit
Bit
06
46
DC
BC
07
------9C
---
1
1
4
2
1
1
Bit
Word
Word
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
173
FINS Commands
5-3-3
Section 5-3
MEMORY AREA WRITE: 01 02
Writes data to the specified number of consecutive words starting from the
specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
01
02
Command
Beginning address No. of items
(binary)
code
I/O memory area code
Data (for number of items)
Response Format
01
02
Command
code
Parameters
End code
I/O memory area code, beginning address, number of items (command)
Specify the type of data written, the beginning address of the data to be written,
and the number of items of data to be written (2 digits hexadecimal).
The memory areas that can be written are given in the following table (I/O
Memory Area Codes). Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for
the specific addresses that can be used.
Data (command)
The data from the specified I/O memory area is returned in sequence starting
from the beginning address. The required number of bytes in total is calculated
as follows:
Number of bytes required by each item x number of items
For details regarding data configuration, refer to Element Data Configurations
on page 163.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the number of items is designated as 0000 (hex), a normal completion end
code will be returned without the write operation being executed.
The MEMORY AREA WRITE command can be executed regardless of the
CPU Unit’s operating mode. It is the user’s responsibility to program steps to
prohibit this command from being executed when the CPU Unit is in RUN
mode if such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS READ
(command code 0601) to read the CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17 CPU
UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01.)
When data is written to the Timer/Counter PV Area, the Completion Flags will
not be turned OFF (0).
174
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
I/O Memory Area Codes
Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
EM Area
Index Register
Data Register
Note
5-3-4
Data type
CIO
WR
HR
AR
CIO
WR
HR
AR
TIM
CNT
DM
DM
EM bank 0 to
bank F
EM bank 10 to
bank 18
EM bank 0 to
bank F
PV
CS/CJ mode
memory area
code (hex)
30
31
32
33
B0
B1
B2
B3
89
CV mode
Bytes per
memory area
element
code (hex)
--1
------80
2
----80
81
2
Bit
Word
Bit
02
82
20 to 2F
--82
---
1
2
1
E0 to E8
---
1
A0 to AF or
50 to 5F
(see note)
60 to 68
90 to 97
2
---
2
0A
---
1
98
DC
BC
98
--9C
2
4
2
Bit
Word
Word
EM bank 10 to
bank 18
EM current
Bit
bank
Word
IR
PV
DR
PV
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
MEMORY AREA FILL: 01 03
Writes the same data to the specified number of consecutive memory area
words.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
01
03
Command
Beginning address No. of items
code
(binary)
I/O memory area code
Data
175
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
01
03
Command
code
Parameters
End code
I/O memory area code, beginning address, number of items (command)
Specify the type of data written, the beginning address of the data to be written, and the number of items of data to be written (2 digits hexadecimal).
The memory areas that can be written are given in the following table (I/O
Memory Area Codes). Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for
the specific addresses that can be used.
Data (command)
Specify the data to be written to the memory area starting from the beginning
address. The data to be written should consist of two bytes.
For details regarding data configuration, refer to Element Data Configurations
on page 163.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the number of items is designated as 0000 (hex), a normal completion end
code will be returned without the write operation being executed.
The MEMORY AREA FILL command can be executed regardless of the CPU
Unit’s operating mode. It is the user’s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the CPU Unit is in RUN mode if
such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS READ (command
code 0601) to read the CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS
READ: 06 01.)
When data is written to the Timer/Counter PV Area, the Completion Flags will
be turned OFF (0).
Data cannot be written if the address is out of range.
If the specified area is force set or reset, clear the force set/reset to write the
data.
I/O Memory Area Codes
Area
Data type
CIO Area
CIO
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
EM Area
WR
HR
AR
TIM
PV
CNT
DM
Word
EM bank 0 to Word
bank F
EM bank 10
to bank 18
EM current
bank
Note
176
Word
Word
CS/CJ mode
CV mode
Bytes per
memory area memory area
element
code (hex)
code (hex)
B0
80
2
B1
B2
B3
89
----80
81
2
82
A0 to AF or
50 to 5F
(see note.)
60 to 68
82
90 to 97
2
2
---
2
98
98
2
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
FINS Commands
5-3-5
Section 5-3
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ: 01 04
Reads in one batch the contents of the specified number of non-consecutive I/
O memory area words, starting from the specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
01
04
Command
Beginning address
code
I/O memory area code
Beginning address
I/O memory area code
Response Format
01
04
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Data
Data
I/O memory area code
I/O memory area code
I/O memory area code (command)
Specify the type of data to read.
The memory areas that can be read are given in the following table (I/O Memory Area Codes). Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for the
specific addresses that can be used.
Beginning address (command)
Specify the first word/bit/flag to read.
I/O memory area code, data (response)
Indicates the data type and contents of the designated I/O memory area(s).
The data in the designated memory area(s) will be returned in the sequence
specified by the command.
The number of bytes that can be read for each item depends on the I/O memory area that is read. For details regarding data configuration, refer to Element
Data Configurations on page 163.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The maximum number of elements that can be read with each command
depends on the network as shown in the following table.
Network
Maximum number of elements
Controller Link Ethernet
167
SYSMAC LINK DeviceNet 89
If nothing is specified after the command code, a normal response will be
returned, but nothing will be read.
If there is an error in the I/O memory area code or beginning address, the I/O
memory area will not be read.
177
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
I/O Memory Area Codes
Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
EM Area
Task Flag
Index Register
Data Register
Clock Pulses
Condition Flags
Note
178
Data type
CIO
WR
HR
AR
CIO
WR
HR
CIO
WR
HR
AR
CIO
WR
HR
TIM
CNT
TIM
CNT
TIM
CNT
DM
DM
EM bank 0 to
bank F
EM bank 10 to
bank 18
EM bank 0 to
bank F
CS/CJ mode
memory area
code (hex)
Bit
30
31
32
33
Bit with forced sta- 70
tus
71
72
Word
B0
B1
B2
B3
Word with forced F0
status
F1
F2
Completion Flag
09
CV mode
memory area
code (hex)
00
----00
40
----80
----80
C0
----01
1
Completion Flag
with forced status
49
41
1
PV
89
81
2
Bit
02
Word
82
Bit with forced sta- 20 to 2C
tus
E0 to E8
--82
---
1
2
1
---
1
Word
A0 to AF or
50 to 5F
(see note.)
60 to 68
90 to 97
2
---
2
0A
98
BC
--98
9C
1
2
2
06
46
DC
BC
07
------9C
---
1
1
4
2
1
1
EM bank 10 to
bank 18
EM current
Bit
bank
Word
EM current
EM current bank
bank No.
No.
TK
Bit
TK
Status
IR
PV
DR
PV
Bit
Bit
Bytes per
element
1
1
2
4
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
FINS Commands
5-3-6
Section 5-3
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER: 01 05
Copies and transfers the contents of the specified number of consecutive I/O
memory area words to the specified I/O memory area.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
01
05
Command
Beginning address
Beginning address No. of items
code
I/O memory area code
I/O memory area code
Source
Destination
Response Format
01
05
Command
code
Parameters
End code
I/O memory area code and Beginning address (command)
Specify the data area to transfer from and the data area to transfer to and
specify the positions for beginning the data transfer.
The memory areas that can be transferred are given in the following table (I/O
Memory Area Codes). Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for
the specific addresses that can be used.
Number of items (command)
Specify the number of words of data to transfer. (Each word consists of two
bytes.) The specified number of words will be transferred in sequence from
the source beginning address onwards to the destination beginning address
onwards.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the number of items is designated as 0000 (hex), a normal completion end
code will be returned without the copy operation being executed.
It is the user’s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from
being executed when the CPU Unit is in RUN mode if such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS READ (command code 0601) to read the
CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01.)
Even if data is written to the Timer/Counter PV Area, the Completion Flags
will not be turned OFF (0).
179
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
I/O Memory Area Codes
Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
EM Area
Data type
CIO
WR
HR
AR
TIM
CNT
DM
EM bank 0 to
bank F
Word
PV
Word
Word
EM bank 10 to
bank 18
EM current
Word
bank
Note
5-3-7
CS/CJ mode
memory area
code (hex)
B0
B1
B2
B3
89
CV mode
Bytes per
memory area
element
code (hex)
80
2
----80
81
2
82
A0 to AF or
50 to 5F
(see note.)
60 to 68
82
90 to 97
2
2
---
2
98
98
2
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
PARAMETER AREA READ: 02 01
Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive CPU Unit parameter area words starting from the specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
02
01
Command
code
80
Parameter Beginning No. of words
area code
word
Response Format
02
01
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Parameter Beginning No. of words
area code
word
Data
Parameter area code (command and response)
Specify the parameter area to read. The parameter area code is designated in
two bytes. The leftmost byte is always 80 (hex) and the rightmost byte specifies the parameter area.
Beginning word (command and response)
Specify the first word to read. The beginning word address specifies the relative word address, with the beginning of the designated area as 0000 (hex).
180
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Parameter Areas
The areas that can be read are shown below, along with their parameter area
codes.
Parameter
area code
Parameter
area code
Address range
(Hex)
PLC Setup Area
8010
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
I/O Table Registration Area
8012
0000 to 04FF (1,280 words)
Routing Table Area
8013
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
CPU Bus Unit Setup Area
8002
0000 to 143F (5184 words)
8000
Address range
(Hex)
0000 to 1F3F
8000 words)
Number of words (command and response)
Bits 0 to 14 are used to specify the number of words to be read. (Each word
consists of 16 bits.) Bit 15 must be OFF (0) in the command format. When the
content in the response format contains the last word of data in the specified
parameter area, bit 15 will be ON (1). For example, it would indicate that the
512th word of data is contained in the PLC Setup area.
Data (response)
The data in the specified parameter area will be returned in sequence starting
from the beginning word. The leftmost bits (bits 8 to 15) of each word are read
first, followed by the rightmost bits (bits 0 to 7). The required number of bytes
in total for each read is calculated as follows:
Number of words x 2 (each word consists of 16 bits)
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
All words in the specified parameter area must be read at the same time to
ensure complete data. A maximum of 498 words can be read with each command. (One word = 16 bits.) To read larger parameter areas, use multiple
commands and specify the beginning word and number of words for each.
If more than 498 words is specified as the number of elements, the maximum
number of words will be read and returned with a response code of 1108 hex.
If the beginning word plus the number of words specified to read exceeds the
capacity of the specified area, the data read through the end of the area and
the actual number of words read will be returned with a response of 1104 hex.
Except for the routing table area, each area must be read or written in its
entirety.
5-3-8
PARAMETER AREA WRITE: 02 02
Writes data to the specified number of consecutive CPU Unit parameter area
words starting from the specified word.
Data can be written to the I/O table only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM
mode.
Note Some PLC Setup parameters cannot be written in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
No
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
181
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
02
02
Data
Command Parameter Beginning No. of words
area code
word
code
Response Format
02
02
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Parameter area code (command and response)
Specify the parameter area to write. The parameter area code is designated
in two bytes. The leftmost byte is always 80 (hex) and the rightmost byte specifies the parameter area.
Beginning word (command and response)
Specify the first word to write. The beginning word address specifies the relative word address, with the beginning of the designated area as 0000 (hex).
Parameter Areas
The areas that can be written to are shown below, along with their parameter
area codes.
Parameter
area code
Address range
(Hex)
PLC Setup Area
8010
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
I/O Table Registration Area
8012
0000 to 04FF (1,280 words)
Routing Table Area
8013
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
CPU Bus Unit Setup Area
8002
0000 to 143F (5184 words)
Parameter
area code
8000
Address range
(Hex)
0000 to 1F3F
8000 words)
Number of words (command)
Bits 0 to 14 are used to specify the number of words to be written. (Each word
consists of two bytes.) Bit 15 must be ON (1) when data is written to the last
word in the specified parameter area or no data will be written. If the number
of write words is set to 0000, no words will be written and a normal end code
will be returned.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Without last word data to be written.
Bit 15 ON (1): With last word data to be written.
Bits 0 to 14: No. of words to be written
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
Data (command)
The data to be written. The leftmost bits (bits 15 to 8) of each word must be
specified first, followed by the rightmost bits (bits 7 to 0). The required number
of bytes in total for each write can be calculated as follows:
No. of words x 2 (each word consists of two bytes)
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
182
FINS Commands
Comments
Section 5-3
Parameters will be written regardless of the operating mode of the CPU Unit.
There are some settings in the PLC Setup that cannot and will not be written if
the CPU Unit is in RUN mode, but the end code will be 0000 nevertheless. It is
the user’s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being
executed when the CPU Unit is in the RUN mode if such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS READ (command code 0601) to read the
CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01.)
Data can only be written to the I/O registration table when the CPU Unit is in
PROGRAM mode.
All words in the specified parameter area must be written at the same time to
ensure complete data. A maximum of 498 words can be written with each
command. Nothing will be written if more than 498 words are specified. To
write larger parameter areas, use multiple commands and specify the beginning word for each.
Except for the routing table area, each area must be read or written in its
entirety.
5-3-9
PARAMETER AREA CLEAR: 02 03
Writes all zeros to the specified number of consecutive parameter area words
to clear the previous data. The I/O table can be cleared only when the CPU
Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
Note Some PLC Setup parameters cannot be written in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
No
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
02
03
00
00
Command Parameter Beginning
area code
word
code
00
No. of
words
00
Data
Response Format
02
03
Command End code
code
Parameters
Parameter area code (command)
Specify the parameter area to clear.
Beginning word (command)
Always 0000.
Number of words (command)
Specify the number of words to clear. (One word = 16 bits.) If the number of
write words is set to 0000, no words will be written and a normal end code will
be returned.
183
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Parameter Areas
The areas that can be written to are shown below, along with their parameter
area codes.
Parameter
area code
Parameter
area code
Address range
(Hex)
PLC Setup Area
8010
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
I/O Table Registration Area
8012
0000 to 04FF (1,280 words)
Routing Table Area
8013
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
CPU Bus Unit Setup Area
8002
0000 to 143F (5184 words)
8000
Address range
(Hex)
0000 to 1F3F
8000 words)
Data (command)
Set to 0000. The number of words to be cleared is specified by the number of
words in the command format. This parameter has two bytes (one word) of
data.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The PARAMETER AREA CLEAR command can be executed regardless of
the CPU Unit’s mode. It is the user’s responsibility to program steps to prohibit
this command from being executed when the CPU Unit is in the RUN mode if
such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS READ (command
code 0601) to read the CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS
READ: 06 01.)
Data can only be cleared from the I/O registration table when the CPU Unit is
in PROGRAM mode. When data is cleared from the I/O registration table for
CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit enters the status where I/O is automatically allocated at power-ON and the status of mounted Units is reflected in the
I/O registration table. It is not simply cleared to 0000 hex.
Each parameter area must be cleared in its entirety.
5-3-10 PROGRAM AREA READ: 03 06
Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive program area
words starting from the specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
No
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Command Format
03
06
Command
code
184
FF
FF
Program
No.
Beginning word
No. of
bytes
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
03
06
Command End code
code
Parameters
FF
FF
Program
No.
Beginning address
Data
No. of
bytes
Program No. (command and response)
Set to FFFF (hex).
Beginning address (command and response)
For the beginning address, the beginning of the program area is specified as a
relative address of 00000000 (hex). The beginning address must be a multiple
of four.
Number of bytes (command and response)
The number of bytes must be a multiple of four, and no greater than 992. The
leftmost bit (bit 15) indicates whether the data at the last address in the program area is included. If bit 15 is ON (1) when the response is returned, it indicates that the data at the last address in the program area is included in the
read data. Bit 15 must be OFF (0) in the command format.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Without last address data
Bit 15 ON (1): With last address data
Bits 0 to 14: Number of bytes read
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
Data (response)
The data in the specified program area will be returned in sequence starting
from the beginning word.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
A maximum of 992 bytes can be read with each command. Partition the data
into units of 992 bytes or less and use as many commands as necessary to
read from 00000000 (hex) to the final address.
When the "Prohibit from saving into a memory card, and transferring program
from PLC)" setting is enabled, this command cannot be executed.
5-3-11 PROGRAM AREA WRITE: 03 07
Writes data to the specified number of consecutive program area words starting from the specified word.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
No
MONITOR mode
No
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
185
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
03
07
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Beginning word
No. of
bytes
Data
Response Format
03
07
FF
Command End code
code
Parameters
FF
Program
No.
Beginning word
No. of
bytes
Program No. (command and response)
Always FFFF (hex).
Beginning word (command and response)
For the beginning address, the beginning of the program area is specified as a
relative address of 00000000 (hex). The beginning address must be a multiple
of four.
Number of bytes (command and response)
Specify the number of bytes of data to write. The number of bytes must be a
multiple of 4 and 996 or less. The leftmost bit (bit 15) is used to indicate when
program area writing is completed. Bit 15 must be ON (1) the last word of data.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Not last word of data
Bit 15 ON (1): Last word of data
Bits 0 to 14: Number of bytes written
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
Data (command)
Specify the data to be written by designating the beginning address and the
number of bytes.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The PROGRAM AREA WRITE command can be executed only when the
CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
A maximum of 996 bytes can be written with each command. Partition the
data into units of 996 bytes or less and use as many commands as necessary
to write from 00000000 (hex) to the final address.
When the "Prohibit from overwriting to a protected program" setting is
enabled, this command cannot be executed.
5-3-12 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR: 03 08
Completely initializes the contents of the program area, from the beginning of
the program area to the final program address.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
No
186
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
No
MONITOR mode
No
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
03
08
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Clear code
Response Format
03
08
Command End code
code
Parameters
Program No. (command)
Set to FFFF (hex).
Clear code (command)
Without interrupt tasks: 00 (hex)
With interrupt tasks:
10 (hex)
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The program area can be cleared even if it is read-protected from a Programming Device. When the program area is cleared, protection will also be
cleared.
Without Interrupt Tasks
In this mode, only one single cyclic task 0 is set up.
Name
Power interrupt task
Scheduled interrupt task
I/O interrupt task
Cyclic task
Number
0
0
0
1
Task No.
------0
With Interrupt Tasks
In this mode, one single cyclic task 0 and one or several interrupt tasks are set
up.
Name
Power interrupt task
Scheduled interrupt task
1
2
Number
I/O interrupt task
32
Cyclic task
1
Task No.
1
2
3
100
.
.
131
0
Note Interrupt tasks and cyclic tasks contain only one END(001) instruction after
execution.
When the "Prohibit from overwriting to a protected program" setting is
enabled, this command cannot be executed.
187
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
5-3-13 RUN: 04 01
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode to MONITOR or RUN, enabling the
PLC to execute its program.
Note The CPU Unit will start operation when RUN is executed. You must confirm
the safety of the system before executing RUN.
When the "prohibit overwriting of protected program" setting is enabled, this
command cannot be executed.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
04
01
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Mode
Response Format
04
01
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Program number (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
Mode (command)
Set the CPU Unit’s operating mode as follows:
02 (hex):
Change to MONITOR mode.
04 (hex):
Change to RUN mode.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If only the command code or only the command code and program number
are sent, the mode will be changed to MONITOR mode.
If the CPU Unit’s operating mode has already been changed to the intended
mode when this command is sent, a normal completion will be returned.
5-3-14 STOP: 04 02
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating mode to PROGRAM, stopping program
execution.
Note The CPU Unit will stop operation when STOP is executed. You must confirm
the safety of the system before executing STOP.
188
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
04
02
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Response Format
04
02
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Program number (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the CPU Unit’s operating mode has already been changed to the intended
mode when this command is sent, a normal completion will be returned.
If only the command code or only the command code and program number
are to be sent, the operating mode will be changed to the PROGRAM mode.
5-3-15 CPU UNIT DATA READ: 05 01
Reads the following data:
• CPU Unit model
• CPU Bus Unit configuration
• CPU Unit internal system version
• Remote I/O data
• Area data
• CPU Unit information
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
05
01
Command
code
Data
189
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
The format is as shown below if 00 (hex) is specified as the data to be read,
i.e., from the CPU Unit model to the area data.
05
01
20 bytes
Command End code
code
CPU Unit
model
20 bytes
40 bytes
CPU Unit
For system
use
internal system
version
12 bytes
Area data
The format is as shown below if 01 (hex) is specified as the data to be read,
i.e., from the CPU Bus Unit configuration to the CPU Unit information.
05
01
64 bytes
Command End code
CPU Unit information
CPU Bus
code
Unit configuration
Remote I/O data
The format is as shown below if nothing is entered as the data to be read, i.e.,
all data from the CPU Unit model to the CPU Unit information.
05
01
Command
code
End code
20 bytes
20 bytes
40 bytes
CPU Unit
model
CPU Unit
internal system
version
For system
use
12 bytes
Area data
64 bytes
CPU Bus
Unit configuration
Data read for 00 (Hex)
Parameters
CPU Unit information
Remote I/O data
Data read for 01 (Hex)
Data (command)
Specify the data to be read as follows:
Value
Data to be read
00
01
CPU Unit model
CPU Bus Unit configuration
CPU Unit internal system Remote I/O data
version
CPU Unit information
Area data
CPU Unit model and internal system version (response)
Each is returned in not more than 20 bytes in ASCII (i.e. 20 ASCII characters).
If the model or internal system version requires less than 20 characters, the
model field will be filled with spaces and the internal system version field will
be filled with null codes.
For system use (response)
Reserved for system use.
1st byte 2nd byte
34rh byte
Reserved for system.
Largest EM bank number
DIP switch data
Item
DIP switch data
Largest EM bank
number
190
Meaning
Unit
Status of DIP switch on front panel of CPU Unit: --Pins 0 to 7 correspond to bits 0 to 7 (ON: 1; OFF:
0)
Largest number, 0 to 19, in CPU Unit’s EM area. Bank
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Area data (response)
The area data is configured as follows:
1st byte
12th byte
Not used.
Program
No. of DM words
area size
IOM size
Timer/counter EM size
size
Item
Program area size
IOM size
Meaning
Maximum size of usable program area
The size of the area (CIO, WR, HR, AR, timer/
counter completion flags, TN) in which bit commands
can be used (always 23).
Number of DM words
Total words in the DM area (always 32,768)
Timer/counter size
Maximum number of timers/counters available
(always 8)
EM non-file memory size Among the banks in the EM area, the number of
banks (0 to D) without file memory.
Memory card type
00: No memory card
04: Flash memory
Memory card size
Size of the memory card (0000 if there is no memory
card)
Memory card
size
Memory card type
Unit
K words (1K words = 1,024 words)
K bytes (1K bytes = 1,024 bytes)
Words
x 1,024
Banks (1 bank = 32,768 words)
--K byte (1 word = 2 bytes)
CPU Bus Unit configuration (response)
Each CPU Bus Unit has a code assigned to it consisting of two ASCII characters (two bytes). These codes are given in the numerical order according to
the unit number of the CPU Bus Units (unit 0 to 15).
1st byte
32nd byte
ID for No. 0 ID for No. 1
ID for No. 15
64th byte
Reserved for system (32 bytes).
ID Format
Bits 00 to 14: Model ID
Bit 15: Unit presence (1: Present, 0: Not present)
Remote I/O data (response)
The number of SYSMAC BUS Master Units mounted in remote I/O systems is
returned in a single byte (00 to 02 hex) as follows:
00
No. of SYSMAC BUS Masters mounted (second byte)
Always 00 Hex (first byte)
191
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
CPU Unit information (response)
The total number of racks (CPU Racks + Expansion I/O Racks) connected to
the CPU Unit is returned in a single byte (8 bits) of data in the configuration
shown below.
7
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Number of Racks connected to the CPU Unit
= CPU Rack + Expansion I/O Racks (1 to 8 Hex).
Not used.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
5-3-16 CONNECTION DATA READ: 05 02
Reads the model number of the specified Units.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
protection
OK
Network write
protection
OK
Command Format
RUN mode
OK
05
MONITOR mode
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
02
Command
code
Unit address
Number of
items
Response Format
05
02
20 bytes
Command End code
code
Model number
Unit address
Number of items
Parameters
20 bytes
Model number
Unit address
Data
Unit address (command and response)
Specify the unit address of the first Unit whose connection data is to be read.
If the specified Unit does not exist, the connection data is read from the next
Unit. Specify the following for the unit address.
CPU Unit: 00 (hex)
CPU Bus Unit: 10 + unit number (10 to 1F hex)
Special I/O Unit: 20 + unit number (20 to 7F hex)
Inner Board: E1 (hex)
Number of items (command)
Specify the number of items to be read. The number of items will be returned
in order for the number specified, beginning with the unit address set in the
“unit address” parameter. Any number between 01 and 19 (hexadecimal) can
be specified. If the number of items is not specified, 19 hex (25) will be used.
192
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Number of Units (response)
The number of Units for which the connection data is being returned. If bit 7 is
ON (1), it means that the data for the last Unit is being returned. The maximum setting is 19 hex (25). If the number of items is not specified, 19 hex (25)
will be used.
Unit address and model number (response)
These response parameters show the unit address and model number. The
model number is provided in up to 20 ASCII characters.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
5-3-17 CPU UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01
Reads the operating status of the CPU Unit.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
06
01
Command
code
Response Format
06
01
16 bytes
Command End code
code
Fatal error
data
Non-fatal
error data
Message
Yes/no
Error
code
Error
message
Status Mode
Parameters
Bit
7
Status (response)
The operating status of the CPU Unit is as shown below. Bits 3 to 6 are undefined. Always mask these bits before accessing them.
6
5
4
3
−
−
−
−
2
1
0
Undefined
Status
0: Stop (user program is not being executed)
1: Run (user program is being executed)
Built-in flash memory access (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, CP1H, NSJ, and CS1D only)
0: Not writing, 1: Writing
Battery status (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, CP1H, NSJ, and CS1D only)
0: No battery, 1: Battery present
CPU status
0: Normal
1: CPU on standby
(waiting for a signal from a device,
such as a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Unit).
193
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Mode (response)
The CPU Unit operating mode is as follows:
00: PROGRAM
02: MONITOR
04: RUN
Fatal error data (response)
Fatal error data for the CPU Unit is configured as follows:
First byte
Bit
Second byte
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: FALS error
1: Cycle time over
1: Program error
1: I/O setting error
1: I/O point overflow
1: Fatal Inner Board error
1: Duplication error
1: I/O bus error
1: Memory error
Non-fatal error data (response)
Non-fatal error data for the CPU Unit is configured as follows:
First byte
Bit
15
14
13 12
11
Second byte
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Other non-fatal errors
Reserved for system.
1: Special I/O Unit setting error
1: CS1 CPU Bus Unit setting error
1: Battery error
1: SYSMAC BUS error
1: Special I/O Unit error
1: CPU Bus Unit error
1: Inner Board error
1: I/O verification error
1: PLC Setup error
Reserved for system.
1: Basic I/O Unit error
1: Interrupt task error
1: Duplex error
1: FAL error
Note For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s operation manual.
Message yes/no (response)
If MSG(046) has been executed, the bit corresponding to the message number will be ON (1) as shown below. To read the messages generated by
194
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
MSG(195), execute MESSAGE READ (command code 0920). Refer to 5-3-21
MESSAGE READ: 09 20.
First byte
Bit 15
8
0
0
Second byte
7
6
5
4
3
Always 0.
2
1
0
Message No. 0 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 1 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 2 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 3 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 4 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 5 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 6 (0: no/1: yes)
Message No. 7 (0: no/1: yes)
Error code (response)
Among errors that occur when the command is executed, the error code indicates the most serious. If there are no errors, it will be 0000 (hex).
Error message (response)
Indicates messages from execution of FAL(006) or FALS(007). If there is no
error message, or if FAL(006) or FALS(007) are not being executed, 16
spaces (ASCII 20) will be returned.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
To read the error log, read the appropriate Auxiliary Area words or execute
ERROR LOG READ command (command code 2102). Refer to 5-3-28
ERROR LOG READ: 21 02.
5-3-18 CYCLE TIME READ: 06 20
Initializes the PLC’s cycle time history or reads the average, maximum, and
minimum cycle time.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
No
Command Format
06
20
Command
Parameter
code
Response Format
The response format is as follows when the parameter is 00 hex:
06
20
Command End code
code
195
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
The response format is as follows when the parameter is 01 hex (read):
06
20
Command End code
code
Parameters
Average cycle time
Max. cycle time
Min. cycle time
Parameter code (command)
Specify the operations for this command as follows:
00 (hex): Initializes the cycle time.
01 (hex): Reads the average, maximum, and minimum cycle time.
Average cycle time (response)
The CPU Unit continuously calculates the cycle time, and remembers the previous eight cycle times. The “average cycle times” is the average of these
eight cycle times, expressed as four bytes of binary data in 0.1-ms increments.
The average cycle time is obtained as follows:
Average cycle time = (Sum of 8 previous cycle times)/8
In the following example the average cycle time is 65.0 ms.
00
00
02
8A
Maximum cycle time
The maximum cycle time is the maximum value, of the cycle time measured
after the cycle time initialize request is received. It is expressed in four binary
bytes, in increments of 0.1 ms.
Minimum cycle time
The minimum cycle time is found in the same way as the maximum cycle time
described above.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The maximum and minimum cycle times are initialized when operation is
started.
5-3-19 CLOCK READ: 07 01
Reads clock information.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
Command Format
07
01
Command
code
196
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
07
01
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of week
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week (response)
The year, month, day of month, hour, minute, and second are expressed in
BCD.
Year: The rightmost two digits of the year. (1998, 1999, and 2000 are
expressed as 98, 99, and 00 respectively. 2096 and 2097 will be expressed as
96 and 97.)
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD).
Day of week: As follows:
Value (hex)
Day of week
00
Sun
01
Mon
02
Tues
03
Wed
04
Thur
05
Fri
06
Sat
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
5-3-20 CLOCK WRITE: 07 02
Writes clock information.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
Network write
protection
No
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
OK
OK
OK
Command Format
07
02
Command
Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of week
code
Response Format
07
02
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week (response)
The year, month, day of month, hour, minute, and second are expressed in
BCD.
Year: The rightmost two digits of the year. (1998, 1999, and 2000 are
expressed as 98, 99, and 00 respectively. 2096 and 2097 will be expressed as
96 and 97.)
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD).
197
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Day of week: As follows:
Value (hex)
Day of week
00
Sun
01
Mon
02
Tues
03
Wed
04
Thur
05
Fri
06
Sat
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the second and the day of week are not specified, 00 (BCD) will be set as
the second and the previous value will be kept for the day.
If the second is specified, but the day of week is omitted, the previous setting
will not be changed.
The PLC does not check the day of week from the day of month. This means
that no error will occur even if the day of month and the day of week do not
agree.
The PLC automatically checks the range of the specified data. If any portion
of the data is incorrect, the clock will not be set.
5-3-21 MESSAGE READ: 09 20
Reads messages generated by MSG(195).
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
09
20
Command Message No.
code
parameter
Response Format
09
20
Command End code Message No.
code
parameter
Parameters
198
32 bytes
32 bytes
Message
Message
Message number parameter (command and response)
In the command format, turn ON (1) the bits of the messages to be read. In
the response format, the bits of the messages being returned will be ON (1). If
no bits are turned ON in the command format, all bits will be OFF (0) in the
response format and no further data will be returned.
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
First byte
Second byte
15
14
13
8
0
0
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Set to 0
Message No. 0
Message No. 1
Message No. 2
Message No. 3
Message No. 4
00: Message read
Message No. 5
Message No. 6
Message No. 7
Message (response)
Each message is returned in numerical order, from smaller to larger, according to the message number. Each message consists of 32 ASCII characters
(32 bytes). The total number of bytes of the messages is calculated as follows:
The number of messages read × 32 bytes
If a message consists of less than 32 bytes, the remainder will be filled with
spaces (20 hex). If no message has been registered for a message number
that has been requested, 32 bytes of spaces (20 hex) will be returned.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The MESSAGE READ, MESSAGE CLEAR (refer to 5-3-22 MESSAGE
CLEAR: 09 20), and FAL/FALS READ (refer to 5-3-23 FAL/FALS READ: 09
20) commands share the same command code (0920). They are distinguished by bits 14 and 15 of the two-byte parameter following the command
code. To read MSG(195) messages, bits 14 and 15 must be OFF (0).
5-3-22 MESSAGE CLEAR: 09 20
Clears messages generated with MSG(195).
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No (when clearing
messages)
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
09
20
Command
code
Message No.
Response Format
09
20
Command
code
End code
199
FINS Commands
Parameters
Section 5-3
Message number (command)
Turn ON the bits of the messages to be cleared. Multiple messages can be
cleared at one time.
First byte
15
Bit
0
14
1
13
0
Second byte
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Set to 0
Message No. 0
Message No. 1
Message No. 2
Message No. 3
Message No. 4
Message No. 5
Message No. 6
Message No. 7
01: Message clear
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The MESSAGE READ, MESSAGE CLEAR (refer to 5-3-22 MESSAGE
CLEAR: 09 20), and FAL/FALS READ (refer to 5-3-23 FAL/FALS READ: 09
20) commands share the same command code (0920). They are distinguished by bits 14 and 15 of the two-byte parameter following the command
code. To clear messages, bit 14 must be ON (0) and bit 15 must be OFF (0).
5-3-23 FAL/FALS READ: 09 20
Reads FAL(006)/FALS(007) error messages.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
09
20
Command FAL/FALS No.
code
Response Format
09
20
Command
code
Parameters
200
16 bytes
End code
FAL/FALS
No.
Error message
FAL/FALS No. (command and response)
In the command format, specify in hexadecimal in bits 0 to 13 the FAL or
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
FALS number to be read as shown below. In the response format, the FAL or
FALS number is returned.
First byte
15
Bit
1
14
Second byte
13
8
7
0
0
FAL or FALS No.
10: FAL/FALS READ (returned as 00 in the response)
Error message (response)
The error message specified in the FAL(006) or FALS(007) instruction.
A single error message consists of 16 ASCII characters.
If a message consists of less than 16 bytes, spaces (20 hex) will be returned
for the remainder. If no message has been registered for a message number
that has been requested, 16 bytes of spaces (20 hex) will be returned.
Message data will be returned as is even if a control code such as CR (0D
hex) is included in the message data.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The MESSAGE READ, MESSAGE CLEAR (refer to 5-3-22 MESSAGE
CLEAR: 09 20), and FAL/FALS READ (refer to 5-3-23 FAL/FALS READ: 09
20) commands share the same command code (0920). They are distinguished by bits 14 and 15 of the two-byte parameter following the command
code. To read FAL/FALS messages, bit 14 must be OFF (0) and bit 15 must
be ON (1).
5-3-24 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE: 0C 01
Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it. Execute the
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE command when you need to execute commands
continuously without being interrupted by other devices. As soon as the execution of the commands has been completed, execute ACCESS RIGHT
RELEASE (command code 0C03) to release the access right. (Refer to 5-326 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE: 0C 03.) If another devices holds the access
right, the device will be identified in the response.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
0C
01
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
201
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
0C
01
Command
code
End code
Unit address of Unit with access right
Node number of device with access right
Network address of device with access right
If any other device holds the access
right, the device will be identified.
Parameters
Program No. (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If any other device has the access right, the access right cannot be acquired
with this command; use ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE (command
code 0C01). (Refer to 5-3-25 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE: 0C 02.)
When ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE (command code 0C01) is executed while
any other device has the access right, subsequent commands cannot be executed from the other device. This command should generally not be used during normal processing.
The following table shows which FINS commands can be executed even
when another device holds the access right.
Command
code
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0201
0202
0203
0306
0307
0308
0401
0402
0501
0502
0601
0620
0701
0702
0920
0C01
0C02
202
Command name
MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA READ
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA CLEAR
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
PROGRAM AREA 5CLEAR
RUN
STOP
CPU UNIT DATA READ
CONNECTION DATA READ
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
CYCLE TIME READ
CLOCK READ
CLOCK WRITE
MESSAGE READ/CLEAR
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
Command execution
while another device
has access right
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command
code
0C03
2101
2102
2103
2140
2141
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2207
2208
220A
Command name
220B
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG CLEAR
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
SINGLE FILE WRITE
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER
(I/O memory to file transfers only)
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER
220C
2215
2220
2301
2302
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Command execution
while another device
has access right
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Note ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE is used to prevent Programming Devices or other
Units from taking the access right when more than one command is to be executed in succession. When finished, always execute ACCESS RIGHT
RELEASE (0C03).
5-3-25 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE: 0C 02
Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
0C
02
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Response Format
0C
02
Command End code
code
203
FINS Commands
Parameters
Section 5-3
Program number (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
Even if any other device has the access right, the access right can be
acquired with this command and a normal end code will be returned.
When ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE (command code 0C02) is executed while any other device has the access right, subsequent commands
cannot be executed from the other device. This command should generally
not be used during normal processing.
The following table shows which FINS commands can be executed even
when another device holds the access right.
Command
code
204
Command name
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0201
0202
0203
0306
0307
MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA READ
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA CLEAR
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
0308
0401
0402
0501
0502
0601
0620
0701
0702
0920
0C01
0C02
0C03
2101
2102
2103
2140
2141
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2207
2208
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
STOP
CPU UNIT DATA READ
CONNECTION DATA READ
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
CYCLE TIME READ
CLOCK READ
CLOCK WRITE
MESSAGE CLEAR
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ
FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG CLEAR
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
SINGLE FILE WRITE
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
Command execution
while another device
has access right
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command
code
220A
Command name
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER
(I/O memory to file transfers only)
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
220B
220C
2215
2220
2301
2302
Command execution
while another device
has access right
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
If this command is executed when another device holds the access right, any
processing being executed by that other device will be aborted. If possible,
wait until all processing has been completed and then execute ACCESS
RIGHT ACQUIRE (command code 0C01). (Refer to 5-3-24 ACCESS RIGHT
ACQUIRE: 0C 01.)
When the access right is forcibly acquired by this command, the device losing
the access right is not notified.
5-3-26 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE: 0C 03
Releases the access right regardless of what device holds it.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
0C
03
Command
code
FF
FF
Program
No.
Response Format
0C
03
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Program number (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The access right can be released by this command even when the access
right is held by another device. In that case a normal end code will be
returned. A normal end code will also be returned if this command is used
when the access right is already released.
205
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
5-3-27 ERROR CLEAR: 21 01
Clears errors or error messages.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
21
01
Command Error reset
code
FAL No.
Response Format
21
01
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Error code to reset (command)
The code of the error to be reset.
The following codes can be used regardless of the operating mode of the
CPU Unit:
Error code
(hex)
FFFF
Meaning
All errors cleared. Resets the all errors that are currently recorded.
(This code can be used in PROGRAM mode only.)
FFFE
Present error cleared. Resets the highest priority error.
0003
Duplex power supply error
0010
Duplex bus error
0011
Duplex verification error
008A
Built-in analog I/O error
008B
Interrupt task error
009A
Basic I/O error
009B
PLC Setup error
00A0 to 00A1 SYSMAC BUS error
00D1 to 00D2 Option Board error
00E7
I/O verification error
• When the registered I/O tables differs from the actual I/O tables
• When an I/O Unit has been added or removed
00F1
Flash memory error
00F7
Battery error
0200 to 020F CPU Bus Unit error (The rightmost two digits are the unit number in
binary of the Unit that has the error.)
• When a error occurs during data transfer between the CPU Bus
Unit and CPU Unit.
• When the CPU Bus Unit has a watchdog timer error
02F0
Non-fatal Inner Board error
206
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
0300 to 035F
0400 to 040F
0500 to 055F
0600 to 060F
4101 to 42FF
Special I/O Unit error (The rightmost two digits are the unit number in
binary of the Unit that has the error.)
CPU Bus Unit setting error (The rightmost two digits are the unit number in binary of the Unit that has the error.)
Special I/O Unit setting error (The rightmost two digits are the unit
number in binary of the Unit that has the error.)
Duplex communications error (The rightmost two digits are the unit
number in binary of the Unit that has the error.)
System error (FAL): FAL(006) was executed.
The following codes can be used only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM
mode:
Error code
(hex)
FFFF
809F
80C0 to
80C7
80E0
80E1
80E9
80EA
80F0
80F1
82F0
C101 to
C2FF
Meaning
All errors cleared.
Cycle time too long.
I/O bus error. This error occurs when there is an error in an I/O bus
check or a Unit has been removed or added when power is turned on
to the PLC.
I/O setting error. This error occurs if the I/O table differs from actual I/
O points in the System.
I/O points overflow
Duplication error. This error occurs if the same unit number is
assigned to more than one Unit or the same word is allocated more
than once.
Basic I/O word duplication resulting from rack first word settings.
Program error.
Memory error. This error occurs if an error is found in the user program, PLC Setup, Registered I/O Tables, routing tables, or CPU Bus
Unit Setup memory.
Fatal Inner Board error.
FALS(007) executed.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
If the specified error is not occurring, a normal end code will be returned.
If the present error is one that can only be cleared when the CPU Unit is in
PROGRAM mode, it will not be possible to clear it in MONITOR or RUN mode.
The cause of the error must be removed before executing ERROR CLEAR
(command code 2101) or the same error will immediately occur again after
the command is executed.
5-3-28 ERROR LOG READ: 21 02
Reads the PLC’s error log.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
Network write
protection
OK
Command Format
RUN mode
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
207
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
21
02
Command
code
Beginning
record No.
No. of
records
Response Format
21
02
Command
code
Parameters
10 bytes
End code
Max. No. of
stored records
No. of
stored
records
No. of
records
10 bytes
Error log
data
Error log
data
Beginning record number (command)
Specify the first record to be read. (The first record number is 0000 hex.)
Number of records (command, response)
Specify the number of records to read. The number of read records will be
returned with the response.
Maximum number of stored records (response)
Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored. (Always 20
records.)
Number of stored records (response)
Indicates the number of records recorded at the time the command is executed.
Error log data (response)
The specified error log records will be returned in sequence starting from the
beginning record number. The total number of bytes required is calculated as
follows:
No. of records x 10 bytes
The configuration of each error record is as follows:
1st byte
Error code 1
10th byte
Error code 2
Minute
Day Hour Year Month
Second
Error code 1, 2
Refer to 5-3-27 ERROR CLEAR: 21 01 for information on error codes. Refer
to the relevant operation manual or installation guide for more details.
Each data record includes the minute, second, day of month, hour (0 to 23),
year (the rightmost two digits), and month in BCD specifying the time that the
error occurred.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The response will contain only the command code and end code if the beginning record number is higher than the number of records contained in the
PLC.
When the PLC does not have the specified number of records, all the records
that have been stored in the PLC will be read and an address range overflow
error will result.
208
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
If the data is too large and exceeds the permissible length of the response format, the part in excess will not be read and a normal response will be
returned.
5-3-29 ERROR LOG CLEAR: 21 03
Clears all error log pointers to 0.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
21
03
Command
format
Response Format
21
03
Command
format
End code
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
This command clears the number of error log records that are stored. It does
not clear data from the error log area.
5-3-30 FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG READ: 21 40
The CPU Unit automatically keeps a log of any access for FINS write commands regardless of the setting. This command reads this log, which tells the
nodes and time when there was access.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
21
40
Command
code
Beginning
record No.
No. of
records
209
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
21
40
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Max. No. of
stored records
No. of
stored
records
No. of
records
read
12 bytes
12 bytes
Access log
data
Access log
data
Beginning record number (command)
Specify the first record to be read. (The first record number is 0000 hex.)
Number of records (command, response)
Specify the number of records to read. The number of read records will be
returned with the response.
Maximum number of stored records (response)
Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored. (Always 20
records.)
Number of stored records (response)
Indicates the number of records recorded at the time the command is executed.
Access log data (response)
The specified access log records will be returned in sequence starting from
the beginning record number. The total number of bytes required is calculated
as follows:
No. of records x 12 bytes
The configuration of each error record is as follows:
1st byte
12th byte
Not Command
Node
Minute
Day Hour Year Month
used code
address
Second
Network
Unit
address
address
Network address
The network address of the node that sent the FINS write command.
Node address
The node address of the node that sent the FINS write command.
Unit address
The Unit address of the Unit that sent the FINS write command.
Command code
The command code of the FINS write command that was received (MR and
MS).
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week
The year, month, day of month, hour, minute, and second are expressed in
BCD.
Year: The rightmost two digits of the year. (1998, 1999, and 2000 are
expressed as 98, 99, and 00 respectively. 2096 and 2097 will be expressed as
96 and 97.)
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD).
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
210
FINS Commands
Comments
Section 5-3
An end code of 1103 hex (address range overflow) will be returned if the
beginning record number is higher than the number of records contained in
the PLC.
When the PLC does not have the specified number of records, all the records
that have been stored in the PLC will be read and a normal response will be
returned.
If the data is too large and exceeds the permissible length of the response format, the part in excess will not be read and a normal response will be
returned.
The following rules apply to records stored in the access log.
• If there is already a record for the same node, the old record will be overwritten with a new one.
• If there is not already a record for the same node, a new record will be
created at the end of the log.
• If the log is full (i.e., 20 records have already been stored), the oldest
record will be discarded and a new record will be created.
5-3-31 FINS WRITE ACCESS LOG CLEAR: 21 41
Clears the access log data.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
21
41
Command
format
Response Format
21
41
Command
format
End code
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
This command clears the access log data for FINS write commands.
5-3-32 FILE NAME READ: 22 01
Reads file data such as the names of files saved in file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
211
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
22
01
Command
code
Disk No.
Beginning
file position
No. of
files
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
Response Format
22
01
Command
code
26 bytes
End code
Disk data
No. of
files
22 bytes
22 bytes
File data
File data
Read file data
Parameters
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory with the file name to be read is specified
as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
Beginning file position (command)
The first file to be read. (The first file number is 0000 hex).
Number of files (command)
The number of file names to be read between 0001 and 0014 (hex). A maximum number of 20 file names can be read at one time. If there are more file
names than that, add one to the number of response files when specifying the
next beginning file position. To read disk data only, specify 0000 (hex) for both
the beginning file position and the number of file names. A response will be
returned for up to the number of files read.
Directory length
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
Disk data (response)
Indicates the file memory data. The configuration is as follows:
1st byte
26th byte
12 bytes
Volume
label
Date/time
Total capacity
Unused capacity
Total No. of files
Volume Label
The volume label is the name registered with the file memory. For details on
the configuration, refer to page 168.
Date and Time
The date and time show the date and time that the volume label was created.
Total Capacity and Open Capacity
The total capacity and open capacity show the total capacity of the file memory being used and the number of bytes still available (hexadecimal).
212
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Total Number of Files
The number of files recorded in the absolute directory path. Volume labels,
hidden files, system files, subdirectories, the current directory (indicated by .),
and the parent directory (indicated by . .) are all counted as files. (The root
directory can contain a volume label, but not a current directory or parent
directory mark.)
Number of files (response)
The number of files that have been read. Bit 15 is ON (1) if the last file is
included.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Without last file
Bit 15 ON (1): With last word file
Bits 0 to 14: No. of files read
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
File data (response)
Each file data consists of 22 bytes. The specified files will be transmitted in
sequence starting from the first file. The total number of bytes required is calculated as follows:
Number of read files x 22 bytes
The configuration for each file data is as follows:
1st byte
22nd byte
12 bytes
File name
Date/time
File capacity
Attribute
File Name
Specify the name of the file. Refer to Volume Labels and File Names on
page 168 for the structure of file names.
Date and Time
Indicates the date and time at which the file was created. (See the note below
for details of the configuration.)
File Capacity
Indicates the size (the number of bytes, in four digits hexadecimal) of the file.
Attribute
First byte
Second byte
Bit 15
8
7
6
−
−
−
−
Reserved area
5
4
3
2
1
0
1: Read-only file
1: Hidden file
1: System file
1: Volume label
1: Subdirectory
1: Archive file
Note Date and Time Configuration:
The data and time consists of 4 bytes (32 bits) and is configured in the way
shown below.
213
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
1st byte
Bit
31
to
7 bits
Year
(0 to 119)
2nd byte
25 24
to
21 20
3rd byte
to
16 15
to
4th byte
11 10
to
4 bits
5 bits
5 bits
6 bits
Month
(1 to 12)
Day
(1 to 31)
Hour
(0 to 23)
Minute
(0 to 59)
5 4
to
0
5 bits
Second
(0 to 29)
All data values are in binary.
Year: Add 1980 to the value returned. (The year is the number of years since
1980.)
Second: Multiply the value returned by two. (The value returned is expressed
in units of two seconds.)
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
5-3-33 SINGLE FILE READ: 22 02
Reads the contents of a file stored in the file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
12 bytes
02
22
Command
code
Disk No.
File name
File position
Data length
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
Response Format
22
02
Command
code
Parameters
End code
File capacity
File position
Data length
Data
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory with the file name to be read is specified
as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
File name (command)
Specify the name of the file to be read. For details on the configuration, refer
to page 168.
File position (command)
Specify the number of bytes (the relative byte address) from the start of the
file from which to start reading. (Files start at 00000000 hex.)
Data length (command)
Specify the number of bytes of data to read.
File capacity (response)
The capacity (bytes) of the file that was read is returned.
214
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
File position (response)
The position of the first data read is returned.
Data length (response)
The number of bytes of data read is returned. If the last data in the file is
included, the leftmost bit in this parameter will be ON.
Data (response)
The specified data is returned in sequence starting from the specified byte.
Directory length
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
By specifying 0000 (hex) as the file position and data length in the command,
is possible to see if the file exists.
5-3-34 SINGLE FILE WRITE: 22 03
Writes a new file to the file memory or appends or overwrites an existing file
stored in the file memory. Designation can be made to protect existing files if
an attempt is made to create a new file of the same name as an existing file.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
22
03
Command
code
12 bytes
Disk no
Parameter
code
File name
File position
Data length
File data
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
Response Format
22
03
Command
code
End code
215
FINS Commands
Parameters
Section 5-3
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory with the file name to be read is specified
as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
Parameter code (command)
As follows:
0000 (hex)
Writes a new file. If a file with the same name already exists, the new file will
not be created.
0001 (hex)
Writes a new file. If a file with the same name already exists, it will be overwritten
0002 (hex)
Adds data to an existing file.
0003 (hex)
Overwrites an existing file.
File name (command)
Specifies the name of the file to be written. For details on the configuration,
refer to page 168.
File position (command)
Specifies the number of bytes from the start of the file from which to start writing. (Files start at 00000000.) To create a new file or add data to an existing
file, specify 00000000 as the file position.
Data length (command)
Specifies the number of bytes to be written.
File data (command)
Specifies the data in sequence from the beginning position, in the amount
specified in “data length.”
Directory length (command)
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path (command)
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
Writing a new file or modifying an existing file must be done within the capacity of the file memory or the SINGLE FILE WRITE command cannot be executed.
When SINGLE FILE WRITE is executed, the clock data of the CPU Unit will
be recorded as the date of the file.
5-3-35 FILE MEMORY FORMAT: 22 04
Formats file memory. Always execute FILE MEMORY FORMAT (command
code 2204) before using a memory card or EM area as file memory.
216
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
22
04
Command
code
Disk
No.
Response Format
22
04
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory to be formatted is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
When FILE MEMORY FORMAT (command code 2204) is executed, all data
registered to the file memory will be cleared. Before executing this command,
check to be sure that it is okay to clear the data. Refer to file memory application procedures in the CPU Unit’s operation manual for details on using file
memory.
FILE MEMORY FORMAT is also used to return EM memory that has been
converted to file memory back to its original form.
Even if only the size of the file memory is changed, the entire file memory will
be formatted.
Note If the current EM bank is specified for file conversion in the PLC Setup when
FILE MEMORY FORMAT is executed for the EM Area, an Area Missing error
(end code 1101) will be returned and a PLC Setup setting error will occur in
the CPU Unit. These errors, however, will not occur if the current bank is EM0.
5-3-36 FILE DELETE: 22 05
Deletes files registered to file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
217
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
22
05
Command
code
Disk No.
No. of
files
12 bytes
12 bytes
File name
File name
Directory
length
Absolute directory
path
Response Format
22
05
Command
code
Parameters
End code
No. of
files
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory with the file to be deleted is specified as
follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
Number of files (command)
Specify the number of files to be deleted.
File name (command)
Specify the name of the file to be deleted. For details on the configuration,
refer to page 168.
Directory length
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
Number of files (response)
Indicates the number of files actually deleted.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The specified files will be deleted in sequence. If non-existing file names have
been specified, the PLC will ignore them and the operation will continue.
5-3-37 FILE COPY: 22 07
Copies a file from one file memory to another file memory connected to the
same CPU Unit.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
218
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
22
07
Command
code
12 bytes
12 bytes
Disk No.
File name
Disk No.
Source
File name
Destination
Directory
length
Copy source
absolute directory path
Directory
length
Copy destination
absolute directory
path
Response Format
22
07
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Disk number (command)
The classification of the copy source and copy destination file memory is
specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
File name (command)
Specify the file to be copied and a new name for the copy destination file.
Directory length
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Copy source and copy destination absolute directory path
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The file will not be copied if there is already a file of the same name at the
destination.
The file will not be copied if an existing file name is given at the copy destination.
The copy destination file is given the same date as the copy source file.
5-3-38 FILE NAME CHANGE: 22 08
Changes a registered file name.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
OK
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
219
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
22
08
12 bytes
12 bytes
Command
code
Disk No.
Old file name New file name Directory Absolute directory
length
path
Response Format
22
08
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory where the file name to be changed is registered is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
Old and new file names (command)
Specify the original file name and a new name for the file. For details on the
configuration, refer to page 168.
Directory length (command)
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path (command)
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The file name will not be changed if an existing file name is specified for the
new file.
Even if the name of a file is changed, the date of the file will remain
unchanged.
Directory names can also be changed. Specify the directory name in place of
the file name.
5-3-39 MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0A
Transfers or compares data between the I/O memory areas and the file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
UM read
protection
DIP switch UM write
protection
Network write
protection
No
OK
OK
No
RUN mode
OK
220
MONITOR mode
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
22
0A
12 bytes
Command Parameter
code
code
Beginning address
Memory area code
No. of
items
Disk No.
Memory area specification
File name
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
File specification
Response Format
22
0A
Command
code
Parameters
End code
No. of items
Parameter code (command)
Specify the transfer/compare method as follows:
0000 (hex)
Data transfer from the I/O memory area to the file memory.
0001 (hex)
Data transfer from the file memory to the I/O memory area.
0002 (hex)
Data compared.
I/O memory area code, Beginning address (command)
The memory area to be used for data transfer or comparison, and the first
address in the memory area to be transferred or compared.
The memory areas that can be written are given in the following table. Refer to
5-2-2 I/O Memory Address Designations for the specific addresses that can
be used.
Area
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
Auxiliary Bit Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
CIO
WR
HR
AR
TIM
CNT
DM Area
EM Area
DM
EM bank 0 to bank F
Data type
Word
PV
Word
Word
EM bank 10 to bank 18
EM current bank
Word
Note
Mode memory area Bytes per element
code (hex)
B0
2
B1
B2
B3
89
2
82
A0 to AF or 50 to5F
(see note.)
60 to 68
98
2
2
2
2
On a CJ2 CPU unit only, 50 to 5F can be specified for the memory area code
of EM banks 0 to F.
Number of items (command and response)
In the command format, specify the number of items, in word units, to be
transferred or compared. In the response format, this parameter indicates the
number of items transferred or successfully compared. Refer to Element Data
Configurations on page 163 for the configuration of elements.
221
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory where the file to be transferred or compared is registered is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
File name (command)
Specify the file to be transferred or compared. For details on the configuration,
refer to page 168.
Directory length
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
Comments
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER (command code 220A) can be executed
regardless of the CPU Unit mode. It is the user’s responsibility to program
steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the CPU Unit is in
RUN mode if such protection is necessary. Execute CPU UNIT STATUS
READ (command code 0601) to read the CPU Unit’s mode. (Refer to 5-3-17
CPU UNIT STATUS READ: 06 01.)
If data is written to the Timer/Counter PV Area, the Completion Flags will not
be turned OFF.
The CPU Unit clock data upon completion of MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER (command code 220A) will be recorded as the date of the file that has
been transferred.
Files cannot be overwritten when transferring data from a memory area to file
memory.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
5-3-40 PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0B
Compares or transfers data between the parameter area and the file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK (See note.)
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
OK (See note.)
OK (See note.)
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Note Data cannot be transferred from file memory to the parameter area.
Command Format
22
0B
12 bytes
Command Parameter Parameter
code
code
area code
Beginning
address
No. of
items
Parameter area specification
222
Disk No.
File name
File specification
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Response Format
22
0B
Command
code
Parameters
End code
No. of items
Parameter code (command)
Specify the transfer/compare method as follows:
0000 (hex)
Data transfer from the parameter area to the file memory.
0001 (hex)
Data transfer from the file memory to the parameter area.
0002 (hex)
Data compared.
Parameter area code (command)
Specify the parameter area to be used for data transfer or comparison. The
rightmost byte is always 80 (hex), and the parameter area is specified with the
leftmost byte.
Beginning address (command)
Specify the position in the parameter area for beginning the transfer or comparison. The beginning of each parameter area is always 0000.
Parameter Areas
There are six parameter areas, each of which has consecutive word
addresses beginning from 0000. The areas that can be written to are shown
below, along with their parameter area codes.
Parameter
area code
Address range
(Hex)
PLC Setup Area
8010
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
I/O Table Registration Area
8012
0000 to 04FF (1,280 words)
Routing Table Area
8013
0000 to 01FF (512 words)
CPU Bus Unit Setup Area
8002
0000 to 143F (5184 words)
Parameter
area code
8000
Address range
(Hex)
0000 to 1F3F
8000 words)
Number of items (command and response)
In the command format, the number of items is always FFFF (hex) so that the
entire parameter area is specified. In the response format, the number of
words transferred is indicated when data is transferred. When data is compared, the response format indicates the position at which a verification error
occurs or the number of words compared.
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory where the file to be transferred or compared is registered is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
File name (command)
Specify the file to be transferred or compared. For details on the configuration,
refer to page 168.
Directory length (command)
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
223
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Absolute directory path (command)
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The clock data upon completion of a parameter area to file memory transfer
will be recorded as the date of the file that has been transferred.
A file can be transferred to the I/O table only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
This command cannot be executed if any other device holds the access right.
Files cannot be overwritten when transferring data from the parameter area to
file memory.
5-3-41 PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER: 22 0C
Compares or transfers data between the program area and the file memory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK (See note 2.)
Note
DIP switch UM write
protection
No (See Note 1.)
MONITOR mode
OK (See note 2.)
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
1. Data can be transferred from the program area to the file memory.
2. Data cannot be transferred from file memory to the program area in these
modes.
Command Format
22
0C
Command Parameter
code
code
FF
FF
00
00
00
00
Beginning word
Program
No.
FF
FF
FF
FF
No. of bytes
Program area specification
12 bytes
Disk No.
File specification
Directory Absolute directory
path
length
Response Format
22
0C
Command End code
code
Parameters
Data length
Parameter code (command)
Specify the transfer/compare method as follows:
0000 (hex)
Data transfer from the program area to the file memory.
224
File name
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
0001 (hex)
Data transfer from the file memory to the program area.
0002 (hex)
Data compared.
Program number and beginning word (command)
Always FFFF (hex).
Beginning word (command)
Always 00000000 (hex).
Number of bytes (command)
Specify the number of data bytes to be transferred or compared. Always
FFFFFFFF (hex).
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory where the file to be transferred or compared is registered is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
File name (command)
Specify the name of the file to be transferred or compared. For details on the
configuration, refer to page 168.
Data length (response)
When data is transferred, the data length parameter indicates the number of
bytes that have been transferred. When data is compared, this parameter indicates the amount of data that was compared with no errors, or the number of
bytes compared in a normal completion.
Directory length (response)
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path (response)
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required. “\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The clock data upon completion of a program area to file memory transfer will
be recorded as the date of the file that has been transferred.
This command cannot be executed if any other device holds the access right
or when memory is write-protected via pin 1 of the DIP switch on the front
panel of the CPU Unit.
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER (command code 220C) cannot be executed when the CPU Unit is in the RUN or MONITOR mode.
Files cannot be overwritten when transferring data from the program area to
file memory.
When the "prohibit save to protected memory card and program transfer (PLC
to computer)" setting is enabled, PROGRAM AREA - FILE TRANSFER cannot be executed.
When the "prohibit overwriting of protected program" setting is enabled, FILE PROGRAM AREA TRANSFER cannot be executed.
225
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
5-3-42 CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY: 22 15
Creates or deletes a directory.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
22
15
Command
code
12 bytes
Disk No.
Parameter
Directory
name
Directory Absolute directory
length
path
Response Format
22
15
Command End code
code
Parameters
Disk number (command)
The classification of the file memory where the directory is to be created or
deleted is specified as follows:
8000 (hex):
Memory card
8001 (hex):
EM file memory
Parameter (command)
Specify either creation or deletion as follows:
0000 (hex):
Create
0001 (hex):
Delete
Directory name (command)
Specify the name of the directory to be created or deleted. For details on the
configuration, refer to page 168. If the directory name is less than 12 bytes, fill
unused bytes with 20 hex.
Directory length (command)
Indicates the length of the absolute directory path. The maximum number of
characters is 65. To specify the root directory as the absolute directory path,
specify 0000 (hex) as the directory length.
Absolute directory path (command)
Indicates the absolute path from the root directory. It begins with \ (5C hex),
and the drive name and colon (:) are not required.“\” is used to delimit the
lower directory. It is not required at the end of the final absolute path. No setting is required to specify the root directory itself.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
226
The CPU Unit’s clock data will be recorded as the date of any directory that is
created.
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
5-3-43 MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER (CP-series CPU Units Only): 22 20
Transfers or verifies data between a Memory Cassette mounted in a CPseries CPU Unit (see note) and the memory areas in the CP-series CPU Unit.
Transfers can go either direction.
Note This command is supported only by CP-series CPU Units (Except CP1E CPU Units).
Applicable data
User program
Parameter area (PLC Setup, CPU Bus Unit settings, and routing tables)
Symbol table
Comments (I/O comments, row comments, and
annotations)
Program indices (section names, section
comments, and program comments)
Function block sources
Data memory
Data memory initial values
Storage location in CPU Unit
RAM (user program area)
RAM (parameter area)
Built-in flash memory (Comment Memory Area)
Built-in flash memory (Comment Memory Area)
Built-in flash memory (Comment Memory Area)
Built-in flash memory (Function Block Source Memory
Area)
RAM (DM Area D0 to D32767)
Built-in flash memory (Data memory initial value area)
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
No
RUN mode
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK (See note.)
MONITOR mode
No
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Note Data cannot be transferred from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette when
the user program is included and DIP switch UM protection is set.
Command Format
22
20
MEMORY
CASSETTE
TRANSFER
Response Format
Disk number
Parameter Data type designation
Other Memory Cassette Operations (Parameter ≠ 8000 Hex)
22
20
MEMORY
CASSETTE
TRANSFER
End code
Reading the Data Type in the Memory Cassette (Parameter = 8000 Hex)
22
20
MEMORY
CASSETTE
TRANSFER
Parameters
End code
Stored data type
Disk number (command)
Specify the disk for transfer or verification. Only the Memory Cassette can be
specified.
8003 (hex):
Memory Cassette
227
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Parameter (command)
Specify the transfer or verification method.
0000 (hex):
Transfer (CPU Unit to Memory Cassette)
0001 (hex):
Transfer (Memory Cassette to CPU Unit)
0002 (hex):
Verify (between CPU Unit and Memory Cassette)
0003 (hex):
Initialize Memory Cassette
8000 (hex):
Read data type in Memory Cassette
Data type designation (command)
Bit 15: All or individual area designation (OFF: All, ON: Individual areas)
OFF: All areas for bits 00 and 02 through 07 (See note.)
ON: Only areas specified by bits 00 and 02 through 07 (Multiple bits
can be turned ON.)
Bits 14 to 08: Reserved
Bit 07: Data memory initial values
Bit 06: Data memory
Bit 05: Program indices
Bit 04: Comments
Bit 03: Symbol table
Bit 02: parameter area
Bit 01: Reserved
Bit 00: User program + Function block sources
Note If bit 15 is OFF and any of bit 02 or bits 02 to 07 is ON, an Other Parameter
Error will occur and an end code of 110C hex will be returned.
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Stored data type (response)
When reading the data type in the Memory Cassette (parameter = 8000 hex),
the following bits corresponding to the stored data will be turned ON. (More
than one bit may be turned ON.)
Bit 07:
Bit 06:
Bit 05:
Bit 04:
Bit 03:
Bit 02:
Bit 01:
Bit 00:
Data memory initial values
Data memory
Program indices
Comments
Symbol table
Parameter area
Function block sources
User program
5-3-44 FORCED SET/RESET: 23 01
Force-sets (ON) or force-resets (OFF) bits/flags or releases force-set status.
Bits/flags that are forced ON or OFF will remain ON or OFF and cannot be
written to until the forced status is released.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM
write protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Note “Forced status” means that the ON/OFF status of the bit/flag is forcibly
retained and writing is prohibited.
228
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
23
01
Command
code
No. of
bits/flags
Set/reset
Bit/flag
designation
I/O memory area code
Bit/flag
Set/reset designation
I/O memory area code
Forced set/reset data
Forced set/reset data
Response Format
23
01
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Number of bits/flags (command)
Specify the number of bits/flags to be controlled.
Set/reset designation (command)
Specify the action to be taken for each bit/flag.
Value
(hex)
0000
Forced reset
Name
0001
Forced set
8000
Forced set/reset OFF release
8001
Forced set/reset ON release
FFFF
Forced set/reset release
Operation
Turns OFF (0) the bit/flag and places
it in forced status. (See note.)
Turns ON (1) the bit/flag and places it
in forced status.
Turns OFF (0) the bit/flag and
releases the forced status.
Turns ON (1) the bit/flag and releases
the forced status.
Releases the forced status while
retaining the ON/OFF status.
I/O memory area code (command)
Specify the I/O memory area of the bit or flag to be controlled.
Bit/Flag (command)
Specify the bit or flag to be controlled. The memory areas in which bits/flags
can be controller are given in the following table. Refer to 5-2-2 I/O Memory
Address Designations for the specific addresses that can be used.
Area
Data type
Bytes per
CV mode
CS/CJ mode
element
memory area memory area
code (hex)
code (hex)
30
00
1
31
--32
---
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Bit Area
CIO
WR
HR
Bit
Timer Area
Counter Area
TIM
CNT
Completion Flag 09
01
1
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
To force set/reset multiple bits/flags, specify the “set/reset designation,” the
“I/O memory area code,” and the “bit/flag” parameters for the number of bits/
flags set in the “number of bits/flags” parameter.
Note If “forced set/reset OFF release (8000)” or “forced set/reset ON release
(8001)” is exceeded for a bit/flag that does not have forced status, only the bit/
flag’s ON/OFF status will be affected.
229
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
5-3-45 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL: 23 02
Cancels all bits (flags) that have been forced ON or forced OFF.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
No
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
No
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
23
02
Command
code
Response Format
23
02
Command
code
End code
End code (response)
Refer to 5-1-3 End Codes for information on end codes.
Comments
The bits/flags in the following memory areas can be forced set or forced reset,
and canceled.
Memory area
Relay areas
Timer/Counter
Data
Bit status
Completion Flag status
5-3-46 CONVERT TO COMPOWAY/F COMMAND: 28 03
When this command is sent to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0
or later, serial port C on the Controller Section of an NSJ Controller, built-in
serial ports of N-type CP1E CPU Units, serial port 1 or 2 on an Option Board
of a CP-series CPU Unit, or a serial port on a Serial Communications Unit/
Board (version 1.2 or later), the CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/
Board removes the FINS header and sends the enclosed CompoWay/F command.
With this command, OMRON components connected to a PLC through CompoWay/F communications can be accessed from a PLC or PT by sending a
FINS message containing a CompoWay/F command.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
RUN mode
OK
230
UM read
protection
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Command Format
28
03
30
Command
code
30
30
Node
Subaddress: CompoWay/
number 00
F
(ASCII) (3030 in
SID: 0
ASCII)
(30 in
ASCII)
CompoWay/F
command
code (ASCII
code)
CompoWay/F
text
(ASCII code)
Response Format
28
03
Command End code
code
Parameters
30
Node
number
(ASCII)
30
Subaddress:
00
(3030 in
ASCII)
CompoWay/F
command
code (ASCII
code)
CompoWay/F
response code
(ASCII code)
CompoWay/F
text
(ASCII code)
Command
Node Number
This is the destination ID number (00 to 99 or XX) in the CompoWay/F system. The characters are specified in ASCII. When sending a broadcast transmission, set the node number to XX (two X's).
Subaddress
The subaddress is 00 for most models and the value is specified in ASCII as
3030 hex. For some models, other values must be set.
CompoWay/F SID (Service ID)
The Service ID is 0 for most models and the value is specified in ASCII as 30
hex. For some models, other values must be set.
CompoWay/F Command Code
This is the CompoWay/F command code. For details, refer to the command
manual for the CompoWay/F Slave.
CompoWay/F Text (Command and Response)
This is the data that follows the command code.
Response
Node Number
This is the destination ID number (00 to 99 or XX) in the CompoWay/F system. The characters are specified in ASCII. When a broadcast transmission is
sent, the node number is set to XX (two X's).
Subaddress
The subaddress is 00 for most models and the value is specified in ASCII as
3030 hex. For some models, other values must be set.
CompoWay/F SID (Service ID)
The Service ID is 0 for most models and the value is specified in ASCII as 30
hex. For some models, other values must be set.
End Code (Response)
The end code indicates the command frame's execution result. (The end code
is not the same as the response code, which is described below.)
231
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
CompoWay/F Command Code
This is the CompoWay/F command code. For details, refer to the command
manual for the CompoWay/F Slave.
CompoWay/F Response Code
The CompoWay/F response code indicates the results of the service
requested by the command code. For details, refer to the command manual
for the CompoWay/F Slave.
CompoWay/F Text
This is the data that follows the response code.
Precautions
• FINS Header (Destination Address)
The following settings are required.
• Destination Network Address (DNA):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, this is the network address associated with the Serial
Communications Unit or Board's serial port by the routing table
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual network address used to specify
the destination PLC.
• Destination Node Address (DA1):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, set 00 hex for communications within the local PLC or
the “Host Link unit number + 1” for serial → serial → serial conversion.
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual node address used to specify the
destination PLC (the “Host Link unit number + 1” for serial → serial →
serial conversion).
• Destination Unit Address (DA2):
This is the serial port's unit address.
Settings for a Serial Communications Board or Unit:
• Unit addresses for serial port 1:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
Unit number
80
84
88
8C
90
94
98
9C
A0
A4
A8
AC
B0
B4
B8
BC
Decimal
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 228
Board
E4
• Unit addresses for serial port 2:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
Unit number
81
85
89
8D
91
95
99
9D
A1
A5
A9
AD
B1
B5
B9
BD
Decimal
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189 229
Board
E5
• Sending CompoWay/F Commands with the CMND Instruction
• Set FINS command code 2803 hex (CONVERT TO COMPOWAY/F) in
S.
• Set the following parameters starting at S+1 in ASCII with the leftmost
byte first: CompoWay/F node number (2-byte ASCII), subaddress (2byte ASCII), SID (2-byte ASCII), CompoWay/F command MRC (2-byte
ASCII), CompoWay/F command SRC (2-byte ASCII), and text (ASCII,
2 × n bytes)
232
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Note For CompoWay/F, set SID 0 (1-byte ASCII: 30 hex) in the leftmost
byte of S+3 and the most significant digit of the CompoWay/F command code's MRC (1-byte ASCII) in the rightmost byte of S+3. Set
the least significant digit of the CompoWay/F command code's MRC
(1-byte ASCII) in the leftmost byte of S+4 and the most significant
digit of the CompoWay/F command code's SRC (1-byte ASCII) in the
rightmost byte of S+4. Be sure to set the remaining data with this 1byte offset as well.
5-3-47 CONVERT TO MODBUS-RTU COMMAND: 28 04
When this command is sent to serial port 1 or 2 on an Option Board of a CPseries CPU Unit, or a serial port on a Serial Communications Unit/Board (version 1.2 or later), the CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/Board removes
the FINS header and sends the enclosed Modbus-RTU command.
With this command, OMRON components connected to a PLC through Modbus-RTU communications can be accessed from a PLC or PT by sending a
FINS message containing a Modbus-RTU command.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
28
04
Command Slave
Function Communications
code
address code
data
Response Format
28
04
Command
code
Parameters
End code
Slave Function Communications
address code
data
Command
Slave Address
Specify the Modbus-RTU device address. Set the address in hexadecimal
between 01 and F7 hex (1 to 247 decimal).
Function Code
Specify the function code of the Modbus-RTU command. Set the address in
hexadecimal between 01 and FF hex (1 to 255 decimal).
Communications Data
Specify the required parameters associated with the function code. The
amount of communications data varies. (In some cases, there is no communications data.)
Response
The response is the same as the command except that it contains an end
code.
233
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Precautions
• FINS Header (Destination Address) Contents
The following settings are required.
• Destination Network Address (DNA):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, this is the network address associated with the Serial
Communications Unit or Board's serial port by the routing table
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual network address used to specify
the destination PLC.
• Destination Node Address (DA1):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, set 00 hex for communications within the local PLC or
the “Host Link unit number + 1" for serial → serial → serial conversion.
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual node address used to specify the
destination PLC (the “Host Link unit number + 1" for serial → serial →
serial conversion).
• Destination Unit Address (DA2):
This is the serial port's unit address.
Settings for a CP1H CPU Unit and CP1L CPU Unit
Serial port 1
(Slot 1 for optional board)
Serial port 2
(Slot 2 for optional board)
CPU Unit port
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Unit address of port
FD hex (253 decimal)
FC hex (252 decimal)
Settings for a Serial Communications Board or Unit:
• Unit addresses for serial port 1:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
Unit number
80
84
88
8C
90
94
98
9C
A0
A4
A8
AC
B0
B4
B8
BC
Decimal
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 228
Board
E4
• Unit addresses for serial port 2:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hexadecimal
Unit number
81
85
89
8D
91
95
99
9D
A1
A5
A9
AD
B1
B5
B9
BD
Decimal
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189 229
Board
E5
• Sending Modbus-RTU Commands with the CMND Instruction
• Set FINS command code 2804 hex (CONVERT TO MODBUS-RTU
COMMAND) in S.
• Set the following parameters starting at S+1 with the leftmost byte first
(see note): Slave address (1 byte), Function code (1 byte), and the
communications data (n bytes).
234
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Note For Modbus-RTU, set the Modbus-RTU Slave address (1 byte) in the
leftmost byte of S+1 and the function code (1 byte) in the rightmost
byte of S+1.
5-3-48 CONVERT TO MODBUS-ASCII COMMAND: 28 05
When this command is sent to a serial port on a Serial Communications Unit
or Board (Ver. 1.2 or later), the Serial Communications Unit/Board removes
the FINS header and sends the enclosed Modbus-ASCII command.
With this command, OMRON components connected to a PLC through Modbus-ASCII communications can be accessed from a PLC or PT by sending a
FINS message containing a Modbus-ASCII command.
Execution Conditions
Access right at
other device
OK
UM read
protection
OK
RUN mode
OK
DIP switch UM write
protection
OK
MONITOR mode
OK
Network write
protection
OK
PROGRAM mode
OK
Command Format
28
05
Command
code
Slave
address
(ASCII)
Function
code
(ASCII)
End code
Slave
address
(ASCII)
Communications
data (ASCII)
Response Format
28
05
Command
code
Parameters
Function
code
(ASCII)
Communications
data (ASCII)
Command
Slave Address
Specify the Modbus-ASCII device address. Set the address in ASCII between
01 and F7 hex (3031 to 4637 ASCII), which is 1 to 247 in decimal.
Function Code
Specify the function code of the Modbus-ASCII command. Set the address in
ASCII between 01 and FF hex (3031 to 4646 ASCII), which is 1 to 255 in decimal.
Communications Data
Specify the required parameters (in ASCII) associated with the function code.
The amount of communications data varies. (In some cases, there is no communications data.)
Response
The response is the same as the command except that it contains an end
code.
235
FINS Commands
Section 5-3
Precautions
• FINS Header (Destination Address) Contents
The following settings are required.
• Destination Network Address (DNA):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, this is the network address associated with the Serial
Communications Unit or Board's serial port by the routing table
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual network address used to specify
the destination PLC.
• Destination Node Address (DA1):
• When a routing table is created to treat the serial communications path
as a network, set 00 hex for communications within the local PLC or
the “Host Link unit number + 1” for serial → serial → serial conversion.
• When a routing table is not created to treat the serial communications
path as a network, this is the actual node address used to specify the
destination PLC (the “Host Link unit number + 1” for serial → serial →
serial conversion).
• Destination Unite Address (DA2):
This is the serial ports unit address.
• Unit addresses for serial port 1:
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bo
ard
Hexadecimal
80
84
88
8C
90
94
98
9C
A0
A4
A8
AC
B0
B4
B8
BC
E4
Decimal
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 228
• Unit addresses for serial port 2:
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bo
ard
Hexadecimal
81
85
89
8D
91
95
99
9D
A1
A5
A9
AD
B1
B5
B9
BD
E5
Decimal
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189 229
• Sending Modbus-ASCII Commands with the CMND Instruction
• Set FINS command code 2805 hex (CONVERT TO MODBUS-ASCII
COMMAND) in S.
• Set the following parameters in ASCII starting at S+1 with the leftmost
byte first: Slave address (2-byte ASCII), Function code (2-byte ASCII),
and the communications data (ASCII, 2 × n bytes).
Note For Modbus-RTU, set the Modbus-RTU Slave address (1 byte) in the
leftmost byte of S+1 and the function code (1 byte) in the rightmost
byte of S+1.
236
Index
A-B
ABORT (XZ), 147
access right
acquiring, 5, 150, 153, 201, 203
at another device, 171
releasing, 5, 150, 153, 205
accessing I/O memory, 4
accessing program area, 3–4, 101
accessing time data, 4, 150, 153
AR AREA READ (RJ), 112
AR AREA WRITE (WJ), 119
ASCII data, 31
commands for CV series PCs
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE, 205
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 58
Communications Port Error Flags, 58
counters
reading Completion Flag status, 177
CPU Unit
status, 3, 101
cycle time
reading, 195
D
DA1, 33
backup
precautions, xvii
Battery Error Flag, xvii
DA2, 33
bits
controlling, 228, 230
destination node number, 33
C
CIO Area
reading, 177
CIO AREA READ (RR), 106
CIO AREA WRITE (WR), 114
clock
reading, 196
setting, 197
CMND(490), 30, 53, 58–59, 170
setting example, 42
C-mode commands, 2
command formats, 9
details, 99–148
execution conditions, 105
force conditions, 102
from host computer, 14
list of, 2, 100
overview, 7–25
partitioned, 10
partitioned responses, 11
response formats, 9
command formats
for C-mode commands, 9
commands
C-mode, 2
from host computer, 14
overview, 7–25
communications, 2
addressed to CS/CJ-series PLCs, 2
FINS, 2, 4–5, 27–65, 151
parameters, 163
partitioned, 10
debugging, 5, 151, 154
destination unit address, 33
DIP switch UM protection, 171
directories
creating/deleting, 226
DM Area
reading, 171, 177
writing, 174–175
DM AREA READ (RD), 111
DM AREA WRITE (WD), 118
E
EM AREA READ (RE), 113
EM AREA WRITE (WE), 120
end codes, 103–104, 155–164
environment
precautions, xviii
error log, 5, 150, 153
ERROR READ (MF), 135
error response format
for C-mode commands, 10
errors
clearing, 206, 209
reading, 200, 207
execution conditions
for C-mode commands, 105
for FINS commands, 171
F
FAL/FALS messages, 200
fatal error data, 194
FCS calculations, 13
237
Index
file memory, 5, 151, 154
files
changing file names, 219
comparing, 220, 222, 224
copying, 218
deleting, 217
file name configuration, 168
reading, 211, 214
transferring, 220, 222, 224
writing, 215
FINS commands, 2, 4–5, 150–151, 170–226
addresses, 36
command format, 35, 170
command frame, 32
command settings, 41
detailed descriptions, 149
execution conditions, 171
explanation, 28
list of, 4, 150
overview, 27–65
response format, 35, 170
response frame, 32
restrictions, 152–154
settings for sending, 34
timing, 59
to CS/CJ-Series CPU Units, 29
types of, 29
using, 30
with Host Link protocol, 43
flags
for network communications, 58
force conditions
for C-mode commands, 102
FORCED RESET (KR), 138
FORCED SET (KS), 137
forced set/reset, 3, 101
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL (KC), 140
H
Host Link communications, 31, 171
command frame, 31
response frame, 32
Host Link FCS, 44
Host Link header, 44
Host Link terminator, 44
Host Link Units
for CS/CJ-series PLCs, 8
HR AREA READ (RH), 108
HR AREA WRITE (WH), 116
238
I-L
I/O memory
accessing, 4, 150, 152
addresses, 163–164
reading, 2, 4, 100–101
registering, 4, 101
table of address designations, 165–171
writing, 3, 100
I/O table
creating, 4, 101
I/O TABLE GENERATE (MI), 144
INITIALIZE (**), 148
installation
precautions, xviii
LR AREA READ (RL), 107
LR AREA WRITE (WL), 115
M-N
machine configuration
reading, 4, 150, 153
memory areas
accessing I/O, 4
comparing/transferring, 220
reading, 171, 177
transferring data, 179
writing, 174–175
messages, 194
clearing, 199
displaying, 5, 150, 153
reading, 198, 200
model code, 3, 101
model numbers
reading model numbers of Units, 192
reading PC model number, 189
MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET (FK), 139
non- fatal error data, 194
O
online edit
precautions, xvii
operating environment
precautions, xviii
operating mode
at startup, xix
changing, 4, 150, 153
Index
P
Parameter Areas
accessing, 4, 150, 153
clearing, 183
comparing/transferring, 222
reading, 180
writing, 181
partitioned commands, 10
partitioned responses, 11
PC
changing to RUN mode, 188
reading controller data, 189
PC MODEL READ (MM), 141
PLC model code reading, 3, 101
precautions
application, xix
general, xv
operating environment, xviii
safety, xvi
program
clearing, 186
comparing/transferring, 224
reading, 184
writing to program area words, 185
program area
accessing, 3–4, 101, 150, 153
PROGRAM READ (RP), 142
PROGRAM WRITE (WP), 143
R
READ I/O MEMORY (QQIR), 146
RECV(098), 58–59
REGISTER I/O MEMORY (QQMR), 145
remote I/O systems, 191
source node number, 33
source unit address, 34
startup mode, xix
status
reading, 4, 150, 153
STATUS CHANGE (SC), 134
STATUS READ (MS), 133
subdirectories, 226
T
TEST (TS), 142
testing, 3, 101
time data
accessing, 4, 150, 153
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ (RC), 109
TIMER/COUNTER PV WRITE (WC), 117
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ (RG), 110
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 1 (W#), 127
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 2 (W$), 128
TIMER/COUNTER SV CHANGE 3 (W%), 130
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 1 (R#), 121
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 2 (R$), 122
TIMER/COUNTER SV READ 3 (R%), 124
timers
reading Completion Flag status, 177
U-V
UM read protection, 171
undefined command (IC), 148
volume labels, 168
response codes, 103–105, 155
response formats
for C-mode commands, 9
responses
partitioned, 11
S
SA1, 33
SA2, 34
safety precautions, xvi
SEND(090), 58–59
service ID, 34
SID, 34
SNA, 33
source network address, 33
239
Index
240
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W342-E1-14
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
01
February 1999
Revised content
02
September 1999
03
April 2000
Page 26: Internal communications setting added for DA1 and SA1.
Page 28: Values for node address changed in table.
Page 37: Last two sentences removed from SA2 description.
04
May 2001
Changes were made throughout the manual to include information for new products
(CJ1G-CPU44/45 and CJ1W-SCU41). In addition, the following changes were made.
Page 15: Information on words per frame and the response format for MS commands
added.
Page 18: Note added after first table.
Page 45: Information on formats for commands to and responses from the host computer
added.
Page 57: Information on end code 23 changed.
Page 60: Description of “UM Area, Read-protected” changed.
Page 63: Information added under “Limitations.”
Page 85: Text under second format diagram changed.
Page 88: Some error names in the response format diagram changed.
Page 118: Information on volume labels and file names changed.
Page 125: Information under “Comments” changed.
Page 131: Command format diagram changed.
Pages 154, 157, 158, 160, 161, 163, 164, 166, 167: Description of directory length
changed.
Pages 155, 157, 158, 160, 161, 163, 165, 166, 167: Description of absolute directory path
changed.
Page 156: Information on attribute, and date and time added. “12 bytes” removed from
response format diagram.
Pages 158, 160: Reference added under “file name.”
Page 160: Second paragraph under “Comments” removed.
Page 161: Sentence added to first paragraph. Reference added under “old and new file
names.”
Page 167: Changes made to information under “directory name.”
05
October 2001
Original production
Page 18: Catalog number corrected for the CQM1 PC.
Pages 31, 117: The S+2 beginning read address for the first command word corrected for
CMND(490).
Changes were made throughout the manual to include information for new products
(CS1G/[email protected]@H and CJ1G/[email protected]@H). In addition, the following changes were
made.
Page ix: Table updated.
Pages 16, 21: New models added.
Page 49: Response Wait Time description corrected.
Page 115: “06: Program missing” corrected.
Page 117: “02: Parity of checksum” corrected.
Page 118: “SFC” removed from “01: No access right.”
Page 120: Two illustrations added and top illustration reworded.
Page 125: “Hex” added.
Page 128: Notes added.
Page 132: Sentence added after table.
Page 135: Addition made to bottom of page.
Page 137: Sentence added toward end of 5-3-8.
Pages 139 and 140: Number corrected at end of 5-3-10 and 5-3-11.
Page 140: Number of bytes description corrected.
Page 141: “All clear” removed twice and “execution” changed to “cyclic” twice.
Page 143: Addition made to command format and sentence added to end of 5-3-14.
Page 144: End of CPU Unit model and version description corrected.
Page 145: “Always 23” added to table.
Page 151: Addition made to response format.
Page 161: Last two lines removed.
Page 162: End of 5-3-28 corrected.
Page 178: Note moved.
Page 179: Table column removed.
241
Revision History
Revision code
Date
Revised content
06
August 2002
“PC” was changed to “PLC” throughout the manual in the sense of “Programmable Controller.”
CJ1M CPU Units and new versions of Serial Communications Units/Boards were added.
Page 28: Description of GCT changed.
Page 35: Note added.
Page 125: Information added following table.
07
May 2003
Changes were made throughout the manual to include information for new products
([email protected]@H and CJ1G/[email protected]@EV1).
Page ix: Table updated to correct catalog numbers and add new catalogs.
Page xiii: A caution added regarding back up information.
Page xiv: Corrected “CJ Series CPU Units” to “CJ1, CJI-H, CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Units.”
Page xv: A caution added regarding operating differences between CS1 and CJ1, CJI-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Units when using factory settings.
Page 22: Table corrected to include new CS/CJ-series models.
Page 30 “00 0A Hex” for first read address in graphic corrected to “0A 00 Hex.”
Page 55: Order of steps 9 and 10 corrected in graphic.
Page 93: “Bit 1” corrected to “Bit 0” in graphic of response format.
Page 113: Note on flags in end code added.
Page 119, 120: Information on flags in end codes and handling errors changed.
Page 132: “00” corrected to “---” in CV mode memory area code column for CIO Area and
AR Area.
Page 150: Information on operating status parameters updated for new models.
Page 151: “Reserved for system” changed to “1: Duplex error” in bit 14 of non-fatal error
data response.
Page 163: Table of error codes updated for new models.
08
December 2003
Pages xi to xvii: PLP information updated.
Front of manual: Information added on unit versions.
Pages 4, 5, 110, and 111: Note and references to it added and 21 40 and 21 41 added.
Pages 24 and 28: Note added.
Page 45: Information on destination unit address changed.
Page 55: Addresses corrected in program
Page 110:
Pages 111 to 113: Column added and 21 40 and 21 41 added.
Pages 146 and 167: “Version” changed to “internal system version.”
Page 163: “FFFF” added to table.
Page 166: Sections added on 21 40 and 21 41.
09
August 2004
“CompoBus/D” was changed to “DeviceNet” throughout the manual.
Pages 8, 38, and 111: Notes added.
Page 15: Section 2-4 replaced.
Page 24: Note changed.
Page 28: Description of ICV and RSV changed.
Pages 28, 29, 41, 49, and 50: Information on GCT changed.
Pages 28, 29, 31, 40, 45, 46, and 48: Information added on new Ethernet Units and other
settings changed.
Page 33: Information on unit addresses added.
Page 34: Graphic changed.
Page 35: Values for gateway count changed.
Pages 39, 41, 44, 45, 47, 49, and 50: Values of GCT/RSV changed.
Page 41: Description of RSV changed.
Page 58: Section added.
Page 70: Status definitions added to graphic.
Pages 111 and 113: Commands added to table.
Page 185: Commands 28 03, 28 04, and 28 05 added.
10
January 2006
Page v: Information on general precautions notation added.
Page xxiii: Information on liability and warranty added.
11
October 2006
Corrections and additions were made throughout the manual to include the following Unit:
CP-series PLCs, [email protected]@P, X-, XA-, and Y-type CP1H CPU Units, NSJ Controllers,
and version 1 of the Serial Communications Units.
Other changes and corrections are as follows:
Pages x to xvi: Changed and expanded.
Pages xix and xx: Models and manuals added.
Page xxxiv: Added precaution on dispose of the product and batteries.
Pages 5, 149, 152, and 223: Added MEMORY CASSETTE TRANSFER command.
Page 15: Replaced most of page.
Page 19: Corrected last two rows of table.
Page 41: Changed last part of note 1.
Pages 72 and 78: Changed “PC” to “PLC” (multiple places).
Pages 84, 227, 229, and 231: Added Board column.
Page 171: Changed Comments section.
Page 191: Changed description of bits 00 and 01.
12
September 2008
Corrections and additions were made throughout the manual to include the following Unit:
[email protected]@-EIP, and CP1L-M/[email protected]@@@[email protected]
242
Revision History
Revision code
Date
13
December 2008
14
July 2009
Revised content
Added the CJ-series CJ2 CPU Units ([email protected]@).
Added the CP-series CP1E CPU Units.
Added the Ethernet option board (CP1W-CIF41).
243
Revision History
244
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Automation & Drive Division
Automation Department 1
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7084/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 1999 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W342-E1-14
0709
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement